Configuration and Use Manual: 2700 Transmitter with

Configuration and Use Manual
P/N 20000326, Rev. EC
November 2016
Micro Motion® Model 2700
Transmitter with
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration and Use Manual
Contents
Chapter 1
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Chapter 2
1
1
1
1
2
2
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Chapter 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flowmeter documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Out-of-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Applying power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Assigning function block channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Configuring the integrator function block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Configuring pressure compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5.1
Pressure compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.5.2
Enabling pressure compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.5.3
Configuring a pressure source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Configuring temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.6.1
Enabling external temperature compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.6.2
Configuring a temperature source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Zeroing the flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.7.1
Preparing for the zeroing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.7.2
Zero procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.7.3
Restoring zero values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Characterization, Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration . . . . . . 23
3.2.1
Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2.2
Smart Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2.3
Meter validation and meter factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2.4
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2.5
Comparison and recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Performing a characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.3.1
Characterization parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.3.2
How to characterize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Performing Smart Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4.1
Preparing for the Smart Meter Verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4.2
Running the Smart Meter Verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.4.3
Reading and interpreting Smart Meter Verification test results . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.4
Setting up automatic or remote execution of the Smart Meter Verification
test 40
Performing meter validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Performing a density calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.6.1
Preparing for density calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Configuration and Use Manual
iii
Contents
3.7
Chapter 4
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
Chapter 5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Configuration map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Configuring standard volume flow measurement for gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.3.1
Configuring gas density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Changing the measurement units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating special measurement units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Configuring the petroleum measurement application (API feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.6.1
About the petroleum measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.6.2
Configuration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Configuring the concentration measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.7.1
About the concentration measurement application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.7.2
Configuration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Changing the linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Changing the output scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Changing process alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.10.1
Alarm values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.10.2
Alarm priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.10.3
Alarm hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configuring status alarm severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Changing the damping values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.12.1
Damping and volume measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Changing slug flow limits and duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring cutoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.14.1
Cutoffs and volume flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing the flow direction parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring sensor parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Changing the display functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.18.1
Enabling and disabling display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.18.2
Changing the scroll rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.18.3
Changing the update period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.18.4
Changing the display password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.18.5
Changing the display variables and precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.18.6
Changing the display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Configuring write-protect mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Enabling LD Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
iv
3.6.2
Density calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Performing a temperature calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing process variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Viewing API process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Viewing concentration measurement process variables . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Fieldbus simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2
Sensor simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1
Viewing alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2
Acknowledging alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
105
106
107
107
107
108
109
109
112
113
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Contents
5.5.1
5.5.2
Chapter 6
Viewing the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Controlling the totalizers and inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Guide to troubleshooting topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Transmitter does not operate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Transmitter does not communicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.4.1
National Instruments basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Zero or calibration failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
AI block configuration error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Output problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.7.1
Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.7.2
Flow cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.7.3
Output scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.7.4
Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.7.5
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.7.6
Fieldbus network power conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.7.7
Linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
EEPROM Checksum Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Status alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Diagnosing wiring problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.10.1
Checking the power-supply wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.10.2
Checking the sensor-to-transmitter wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.10.3
Checking the grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.10.4
Checking the communication wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Checking slug flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Restoring a working configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Checking the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.13.1
Obtaining the test points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.13.2
Evaluating the test points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.13.3
Excessive drive gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.13.4
Erratic drive gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.13.5
Low pickoff voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Checking the core processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.14.1
Exposing the core processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.14.2
Checking the core processor LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.14.3
Core processor resistance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Checking sensor coils and RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.15.1
9-wire remote or remote core processor with remote transmitter installation
136
6.15.2
4-wire remote or integral installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Appendix A PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
A.1
A.2
A.3
PlantWeb Alerts explained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Setting PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Appendix B Model 2700 transducer blocks reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
B.1
B.2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
B.1.1
Transducer block names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configuration and Use Manual
v
Contents
B.3
B.4
B.5
B.6
B.7
B.8
CALIBRATION transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
API transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . .
156
160
174
177
182
186
Appendix C Model 2700 Resource Block Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
C.1
C.2
Resource block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Resource block views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Appendix D Flowmeter installation types and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
D.1
D.2
D.3
Installation diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Component diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Wiring and terminal diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Appendix 2 Connecting with the Field Communicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.1
2.2
2.3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Viewing the device descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Connecting to a transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Appendix 3 Connecting with ProLink II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ProLink II configuration upload/download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting from a PC to a Model 2700 transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
Connecting to the service port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ProLink II language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
215
215
216
216
218
Appendix 4 Using the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the optical switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1
Display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2
Viewing process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3
Using display menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4
Display password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5
Entering floating-point values with the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219
219
219
220
220
220
221
221
222
224
Appendix 5 NE53 history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5.1
vi
Software change history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Contents
Configuration and Use Manual
vii
viii
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
1.1
Before You Begin
Chapter 1
Before You Begin
Overview
This manual describes the procedures required to start, configure, use, maintain, and troubleshoot
Micro Motion® Model 2700 transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus.
Many procedures assume your transmitter is connected to an enhanced core processor. Some
procedures may function differently or be unavailable if your transmitter is not connected to an
enhanced core processor.
Startup
1.2
Safety
Safety messages are provided throughout this manual to protect personnel and equipment. Read each
safety message carefully before proceeding to the next step.
1.3
Flowmeter documentation
Table 1-1
Topic
Document
Installing the sensor
Sensor installation manual
Installing the transmitter
Micro Motion Model 1700 and Model 2700 Transmitters:
Installation Manual
FOUNDATION fieldbus function block reference
documentation
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks
(available via the Rosemount web site at
http://www.rosemount.com)
Calibration
1.4
Flowmeter documentation resources
Communication tools
Most of the procedures described in this manual require the use of a communication tool. Three
communication tools are referred to in this manual:
•
Fieldbus host – There are a number of available fieldbus hosts. In this manual, the Field
Communicator is assumed to be the host. Other hosts, such as DeltaV, provide functionality
that is very similar to that of the Communicator. Basic information on the Field Communicator
is provided in Appendix 2. For more information, refer to the Field Communicator
documentation, which is available online (www.fieldcommunicator.com).
Configuration
All fieldbus hosts require appropriate device description (DD) files in order to communicate
with and configure the transmitter. DD files are available from the Products section of the
Micro Motion web site (www.micromotion.com).
Configuration and Use Manual
1
Before You Begin
•
ProLink II – Basic information on ProLink II is provided in Appendix 3.
IMPORTANT: The Model 2700 FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitter works with ProLink III. The
procedures in this document are for ProLink II. For information about configuration using ProLink
III, refer to the Model 2700 configuration manual, available on the Micro Motion web site
(www.micromotion.com).
•
1.5
Display – Basic information on using the display is provided in Appendix 4.
Out-of-service mode
Fieldbus function blocks may need to be placed in Out-of-service (O/S) mode before you modify their
parameters. The procedures in this manual assume that, if necessary, function blocks have been put in
O/S mode prior to starting the procedure, and that they will be placed back in service (i.e., Auto mode)
after the procedure is complete.
ProLink II automatically handles function block modes.
1.6
Planning the configuration
The ISA configuration worksheet at the end of this chapter provides a place to record information
about your flowmeter (transmitter and sensor) and your application. This information will affect your
configuration options as you work through this manual. Fill out the configuration worksheet and refer
to it during configuration. You may need to consult with transmitter installation or application process
personnel to obtain the required information.
2
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
Startup
Calibration
Configuration
3
Configuration and Use Manual
FIELDBUS INSTRUMENT DATA SHEET
NO
BY
DATE
SHEET
SPEC. NO.
OF
REV.
CONTRACT
DATE
REVISION
REQ. - P.O.
BY
OPERATING
CONDITIONS
FUNCTION
BLOCKS
1
2
Meter Tag No.
Service
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Location
FLUID
Calibrated Flow Range, Units
Max Velocity, Units
Min. Flow
Max. Flow
Min. Pressure Max. Pressure
Min. Temp.
Max. Temp.
Spec. Gravity or Density (max)
Velocity (max)
Pipe Material
Pipe Size Upstream/Dnstream
Schedule
Special Insulator
Process Connections
Approval
Wetted Parts
Mass Flow Accuracy @ Max
Density Accuracy @ All Rates
Pressure Drop @ Max Flow
Calibration Type
FLOW
SENSOR Cal. Rate
Cal. Units
Custom Calibration Points
Dens. for Vol.to Mass Conv.
Spec. Unit Text Totalizer Text
Base Flow Unit Base Time Unit
Conversion Factor
Warning
Instrument Tag Number
Transmitter Style
Mass Unit
Volume Unit
Dens. Unit
Temp. Unit
Display
Safety
Conduit Adapters
Type
TRANS. Input Signal
Baud Rate
Physical Media
Power Supply
Power Cons. on FF Bus
Input Voltage
Device Class
Min. VCRs
Electrical Class
Device Function Block Fixed Type
Resource Block (RB)
Transducer Block (TB)
Analog Input Block (AI)
Analog Output Block (AO)
Discrete Input Block
Discrete output Block
PID Block (PID)
Integrator Block (INT)
Instantiable Function Blocks
CHK'D
APPR.
Operating Flow
Operating Press.
Operating Temp.
PIPE
DATA
57 Transducer Block Type
Electronic microprocessor based
FOUNDATION fieldbus™ H1 ISA.50.02 IEC-61158
31.25 Kbps
Twisted pair wires, (H1) compliant
9–32 VDC, bus powered, 4 wires
11.5 milliamps maximum
Model 2700: 18–100 VDC or 85–265 VAC
Link master
ITK 4.60 minimum
20
FISCO
Other
FOUNDATION fieldbus™ FF-891/FF-892 compliant
Exec. time
18 ms
Exec. time
18 ms
Exec. time
16 ms
Exec. time
16 ms
Exec. time
20 ms
Exec. time
18 ms
Model 2700: DO/DI
Measurement TB
Local Display TB
Enhanced Density TB
DIAGNOSTICS 58 Diagnostic TB
NOTES:
1 – The vendor must provide the Device Description according with the firmware revision of the field device.
2 – It is mandatory to provide the Capability Format File for each type of device.
3 – All devices must show FOUNDATION™ logo.
Calibration TB
Device Information TB
API TB
FOR REFERENCE ONLY. NOT FOR
ISSUE.
2.1
Before You Begin
Chapter 2
Startup
Overview
This chapter describes the procedures you should perform the first time you start up the flowmeter.
You do not need to use these procedures every time you cycle power to the flowmeter.
The procedures in this section will enable you to:
Apply power to the flowmeter (Section 2.2)
•
Check the analog input (AI) function blocks channels and change if required (Section 2.3)
•
Check the integrator (INT) function block mode and configure if required (Section 2.4)
•
Configure pressure compensation (optional) (Section 2.5)
•
Configure temperature compensation (optional) (Section 2.6)
•
Zero the flowmeter (optional) (Section 2.7)
•
1. Check the Analog Output (AO) function Block channels and change if required (Section 2.3)
•
2. Check the Discrete Input (DI) Function Block channels and change if required (Section 2.3)
•
3. Check the Discrete Output (DO) Function Block channels and change if required (Section 2.3)
Startup
•
2.2
Calibration
Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with
the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2
and 3.
Applying power
Before you apply power to the flowmeter, close and tighten all housing covers.
WARNING
Operating the flowmeter without covers in place creates electrical hazards
that can cause death, injury, or property damage.
Configuration
Make sure safety barrier partition and covers for the field-wiring, circuit board
compartments, electronics module, and housing are in place before applying
power to the transmitter.
Turn on the electrical power at the power supply. The flowmeter will automatically perform
diagnostic routines. If the transmitter has a display, the status LED will turn green and begin to flash
when the transmitter has finished its startup diagnostics.
Configuration and Use Manual
5
Startup
Note: If this is the initial startup, or if power has been off long enough to allow components to reach
ambient temperature, the flowmeter is ready to receive process fluid approximately one minute after
power-up. However, it may take up to ten minutes for the electronics in the flowmeter to reach thermal
equilibrium. During this warm-up period, you may observe minor measurement instability or
inaccuracy.
2.3
Assigning function block channels
The four AI function blocks and the AO function block may be assigned to one transducer block
channel each. The default channel configuration for each block is shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
Default channel configuration
Block
Default channel
Units
AI 1
1 (mass flow)
g/s
AI 2
2 (temperature)
°C
AI 3
3 (density)
g/cm3
AI 4
4 (volume flow)
l/s
AO
6 (pressure)
psi
AO
7 (Temperature)
°C
DO
8 (Start Sensor Zero)
DI
9 (Forward/Reverse Indication)
If you need to change the channel configuration you must use a fieldbus host. Refer to Figure 2-1 and
Table 2-2.
Figure 2-1
Assigning function block channels – Fieldbus host
AI Channel or AO Channel
AI or AO
Transducer Scale: Units Index
Output Scale: Units Index
6
AI Channel
– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.
AO Channel
– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.
Transducer Scale: Units Index
– Change the units (if necessary).
Output Scale: Units Index
– If you change the units for Transducer Scale: Units Index, then change
the units here as well to match.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
Before You Begin
DI or DO
DI Channel or DO Channel
DI Channel
– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.
DO Channel
– Set to the transducer block channel this block should report.
Startup
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
7
Startup
Table 2-2
Available transducer block channels
Channel number
Process variable
Function block
1
Mass Flow
Analog Input
2
Temperature
Analog Input
3
Density
Analog Input
4
Volume Flow
Analog Input
5
Drive Gain
Analog Input
6
Pressure
Analog Output
7(1)
API Corr Density
Analog Input
8(1)
API Corr Volume Flow
Analog Input
(1)
API Avg Corr Density
Analog Input
(1)
API Avg Corr Temp
Analog Input
(1)
API CTL
Analog Input
(2)
ED Ref Density
Analog Input
(2)
ED Specific Gravity
Analog Input
(2)
14
ED Std Vol Flow
Analog Input
15(2)
ED Net Mass Flow
Analog Input
(2)
ED Net Vol Flow
Analog Input
(2)
ED Conc
Analog Input
(2)
ED Baume
Analog Input
(3)
19
Std Gas Volume Flow
Analog Input
20
Temperature
Analog Output
21
SNS Actual Flow Direction
Discrete Input
22
SNS ZeroInProgress
Discrete Input
23
SYS AnalogOutputFault
Discrete Input
24
SNS MVFailed
Discrete Input
25
Start Sensor Zero
Discrete Output
26
Reset Mass Total
Discrete Output
27
Reset Volume Total
Discrete Output
28
Reset API Reference (Standard) Volume Total
Discrete Output
29
Reset All Process Totals (not Inv)
Discrete Output
9
10
11
12
13
16
17
18
30
Reset ED Reference Volume Total
Discrete Output
31
Reset ED Net Mass Total
Discrete Output
32
Reset ED Net Volume Total
Discrete Output
33
Start/Stop All Totals (includes Inv)
Discrete Output
34
Increment ED Curve
Discrete Output
35
Reset Gas Standard Volume Total
Discrete Output
36
Start Meter Verification in Continuous
Measurement Mode
Discrete Output
(1) Channels 7 through 11 are not selectable unless the petroleum measurement application is enabled.
(2) Channels 12 through 18 are not selectable unless the concentration measurement application is enabled.
(3) Channel 19 is selectable only if gas standard volume measurement is enabled (see Section 4.3).
8
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
2.4
Configuring the integrator function block
•
•
Before You Begin
The behavior of the INT function block can be configured in two ways:
Mode – The INT function block mode can be configured as:
-
Standard, which provides standard fieldbus INT function block behavior
-
Any of the values in Table 2-3, which cause the INT function block to pass through the
specified totalizer value from the MEASUREMENT transducer block
Resetting – The INT function block can be configured for manual or automatic resetting when
a setpoint is reached.
You can only configure the INT function block using a fieldbus host (Figures 2-2 and 2-3).
Figure 2-2
Configuring INT function block mode – Fieldbus host
Startup
MEASUREMENT
Integrator FB Configuration
Integrator FB Configuration
Table 2-3
– Set to the desired INT function block mode (see Table 2-3).
INT function block modes
Reports the value of this parameter:
Transducer block
Parameter
Standard
None
None — standard FOUNDATION fieldbus
INT block behavior
Internal mass total
MEASUREMENT
Mass Total: Value
Internal volume total
MEASUREMENT
Volume Total: Value
Internal mass inventory
MEASUREMENT
Mass Inventory: Value
MEASUREMENT
Volume Inventory: Value
Internal gas volume total
MEASUREMENT
Gas Volume Total: Value
Internal gas volume inventory
MEASUREMENT
Gas Vol Inventory: Value
Internal API volume total
PETROLEUM
MEASUREMENT
API Corr Volume Total: Value
Internal API volume inventory
PETROLEUM
MEASUREMENT
API Corr Vol Inventory: Value
Internal CM standard volume total
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Std Volume Total: Value
Internal CM standard volume
inventory
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Std Vol Inventory: Value
Internal CM net mass total
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Mass Total: Value
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
Internal volume inventory
Calibration
This mode:
9
Startup
Table 2-3
INT function block modes
Reports the value of this parameter:
This mode:
Transducer block
Parameter
Internal CM net mass inventory
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Mass Inventory: Value
Internal CM net volume total
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Volume Total: Value
Internal CM net volume inventory
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Vol Inventory: Value
Figure 2-3
Configuring manual or automatic resetting – Fieldbus host
INT
Integration Type
Total Setpoint
Integration Type – Set to manual or automatic resetting.
Total Setpoint
2.5
– For automatic resetting, the value at which the totalizer will be reset.
Configuring pressure compensation
Due to process pressure change away from calibration pressure, there can be a change in sensor flow
and density sensitivity. This change is called pressure effect. Pressure compensation corrects for these
changes.
Not all sensors and applications require pressure compensation. Contact Micro Motion Customer
Service before you configure pressure compensation.
Configuring pressure compensation requires three steps:
1. Determining pressure compensation values (Section 2.5.1)
2. Enabling pressure compensation (Section 2.5.2)
3. Selecting a pressure source (Section 2.5.3)
10
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
2.5.1
Pressure compensation values
•
Fixed or current pressure —
•
Flow calibration pressure — The pressure at which the flowmeter was calibrated. Refer to the
calibration document shipped with your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 psi (1.4 bar).
•
Flow factor — The flow factor is the percent change in flow rate per psi. Consult the product
data sheet for your sensor for this value. You will need to reverse the sign of the flow factor.
For example, if the flow factor in the product data sheet is –0.001% per psi, the pressure
compensation flow factor would be +0.001% per psi.
•
Density factor — The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm3 per psi. Consult the
product data sheet for your sensor for this value. You will need to reverse the sign of the
density factor. For example, if the density factor in the product data sheet is –0.00004 g/cm3
per psi, the pressure compensation flow factor would be +0.00004 g/cm3 per psi.
2.5.2
Before You Begin
You need the following values for pressure compensation:
Enabling pressure compensation
Figure 2-4
Startup
You can enable pressure compensation with a fieldbus host or ProLink II. You will need the values of
the three pressure compensation values from Section 2.5.1.
Pressure compensation – Fieldbus host
Pressure Comp
CALIBRATION
Flow Factor
Density Factor
Flowcal Pressure
– Set to Enable.
Flow Factor
– Set to the specified value (in percent per psi) from the sensor product data sheet
(reverse the sign).
Density Factor
– Set to the specified value (in g/cm3 per psi) from the sensor product data sheet
(reverse the sign).
Calibration
Pressure Comp
Flowcal Pressure – Set to the pressure at which the sensor was calibrated.
Figure 2-5
Pressure compensation – ProLink II
2. Select Enable External Pressure Compensation.
3. Select Apply.
4. Navigate to ProLink > Configuration.
5. Select the Pressure tab.
Configuration and Use Manual
11
Configuration
1. Enable and configure the pressure compensation for your transmitter by navigating to View >
Preferences.
Startup
6. Enter the following values:
•
Flow factor
•
Dens factor
•
Cal pressure
7. Select Apply.
2.5.3
Configuring a pressure source
You will need to choose one of two sources for pressure data:
•
Analog Output function block — This option allows you to poll for pressure data from an
external pressure source.
•
Fixed pressure data — This option uses a known, constant pressure value.
Note: If you configure a fixed pressure value, ensure that it is accurate. If you configure polling for
pressure, ensure that the external pressure measurement device is accurate and reliable.
Using the Analog Output function block
You must use a fieldbus host to set up the AO function block. To set up the AO function block as a
pressure source, connect the AI block of the pressure measurement device to the AO block of the
transmitter (Figure 2-6).
Figure 2-6
External pressure source – Fieldbus host
AO Channel
AI
AO
Process Value Scale: Units Index
Cascade
Input
Output
AO Channel
– If changed from the default, reset
to Pressure (value = 6).
Process Value Scale: Units Index – Change the units to match the
pressure sensing device.
Using fixed pressure data
You can set up fixed pressure data with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-7) or ProLink II (Figure 2-8). You
must enable external pressure compensation before you can set the fixed pressure value (see
Section 2.5.2).
12
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
Figure 2-7
Fixed pressure data – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
CALIBRATION
Pressure: Value
Pressure: Value – Set to the appropriate fixed pressure value.
Figure 2-8
Fixed pressure data – ProLink II
Startup
Apply
2.6
Configuring temperature compensation
External temperature compensation can be used with the petroleum measurement application or the
concentration measurement application:
If external temperature compensation is enabled, an external temperature value (or a fixed
temperature value), rather than the temperature value from the Coriolis sensor, is used in
petroleum measurement or concentration measurement calculations only. The temperature
value from the Coriolis sensor is used for all other calculations.
•
If external temperature compensation is disabled, the temperature value from the Coriolis
sensor is used in all calculations.
Calibration
•
Configuring temperature compensation requires two steps:
1. Enabling external temperature compensation (Section 2.6.1)
2. Configuring a temperature source (Section 2.6.2)
2.6.1
Enabling external temperature compensation
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
You can enable temperature compensation with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-9) or ProLink II
(Figure 2-10).
13
Startup
Figure 2-9
Temperature compensation – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Enable Temperature Compensation
Enable Temperature Compensation
– Set to Enable.
Figure 2-10 Temperature compensation – ProLink II
2.6.2
Configuring a temperature source
You will need to choose one of two sources for temperature data:
•
Analog Output function block — This option allows you to poll for temperature data from an
external temperature source.
•
Fixed temperature value — This option uses a known, constant temperature value.
Note: If you configure a fixed temperature value, ensure that it is accurate. If you configure polling for
temperature, ensure that the external temperature measurement device is accurate and reliable.
Using the Analog Output function block
You must use a fieldbus host to set up the AO function block. To set up the AO function block as a
temperature source, connect the AI block of the temperature measurement device to the AO block of
the transmitter (Figure 2-11).
14
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
Figure 2-11 External temperature source – Fieldbus host
AI
Process Value Scale: Units Index
AO
Cascade
Input
Before You Begin
AO Channel
Output
AO Channel
– Set to External Temperature
(value = 20).
Process Value Scale: Units Index – Change the units to match the
temperature sensing device.
You can set up fixed temperature data with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-12) or ProLink II (Figure 2-13).
You must enable external temperature compensation before you can set the fixed temperature value
(see Section 2.6.1).
Startup
Using fixed temperature data
Figure 2-12 Fixed temperature data – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
External Temperature: Value
Calibration
External Temperature: Value – Set to the appropriate fixed temperature value.
Figure 2-13 Fixed temperature data – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Enter value in External
Temperature box
Configuration
Temperature tab
Apply
Configuration and Use Manual
15
Startup
2.7
Zeroing the flowmeter
Zeroing the flowmeter establishes the flowmeter’s point of reference when there is no flow. The meter
was zeroed at the factory, and should not require a field zero. However, you may wish to perform a
field zero to meet local requirements or to confirm the factory zero.
When you zero the flowmeter, you may need to adjust the zero time parameter. Zero time is the length
of time the transmitter takes to determine its zero-flow reference point. The default zero time is
20 seconds.
•
A long zero time may produce a more accurate zero reference but is more likely to result in
zero failure. This is due to the increased possibility of noisy flow, which causes incorrect
calibration.
•
A short zero time is less likely to result in a zero failure but may produce a less accurate zero
reference.
For most applications, the default zero time is appropriate.
Note: Do not zero the flowmeter if a high severity alarm is active. Correct the problem, then zero the
flowmeter. You may zero the flowmeter if a low severity alarm is active. See Section 5.4 for
information about responding to alarms.
16
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
2.7.1
Preparing for the zeroing procedure
1. Apply power to the flowmeter. Allow the flowmeter to warm up for approximately 20 minutes.
2. Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal
process operating temperature.
3. Close the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor.
Before You Begin
To prepare for the zeroing procedure:
4. Ensure that the sensor is completely filled with fluid and the flow through the sensor has
completely stopped.
CAUTION
If fluid is flowing through the sensor, the sensor zero calibration may be
inaccurate, resulting in inaccurate process measurement.
To improve the sensor zero calibration and measurement accuracy, ensure that
process flow through the sensor has completely stopped.
Startup
2.7.2
Zero procedure
You can perform the zero procedure with a fieldbus host (Figure 2-14), the display (Figure 2-15), or
ProLink II (Figure 2-16). If the zero procedure fails, see Section 6.5 for troubleshooting information.
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
17
Startup
Figure 2-14 Zeroing – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Zero Calibration
Zero Calibration
Zero Calibration
– Method parameter that initiates the procedure below.
Adjust the zero time
Next
Set flow to zero
Calibration in progress
Next
Next
Next
18
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
Figure 2-15 Zeroing – Display
Before You Begin
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
ZERO
Select
Startup
CAL ZERO
Select
ZERO/YES?
Select
………………….
CAL PASS
Calibration
CAL FAIL
Troubleshoot
Select
ZERO
• See Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting.
Scroll
EXIT
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
19
Startup
Figure 2-16 Zeroing – ProLink II
ProLink >
Calibration >
Zero Calibration
Modify zero time
if required
Perform Auto Zero
Calibration in Progress
LED turns red
Wait until Calibration in
Progress LED turns green
Red
Troubleshoot
Calibration
Failure LED
Green
Done
• See Section 6.5 for troubleshooting.
• As long as you do not disconnect ProLink II from the transmitter, you
can restore the prior zero result.
2.7.3
Restoring zero values
ProLink II has the ability to restore a prior zero result as long as you have not exited the zeroing
screen.
In addition, if the transmitter is connected to an enhanced core processor, you will be able to restore
the factory zero. Restoring the factory zero can be accomplished using a fieldbus host (Figure 2-17),
ProLink II (Figure 2-18), or the display (Figure 2-19).
20
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Startup
Figure 2-17 Restoring factory zero – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
DIAGNOSTIC
Restore Factory Zero
Restore Factory Zero – Set this parameter to Restore.
Figure 2-18 Restoring factory zero – ProLink II
Startup
ProLink >
Calibration >
Zero Calibration
Restore Factory Zero
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
21
Startup
Figure 2-19 Restoring factory zero – Display
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
ZERO
Select
CAL ZERO
Scroll
RESTORE ZERO
EXIT
Scroll
Select
Current zero display
Scroll
Factory zero display
Scroll
RESTORE ZERO
Scroll
Select
RESTORE EXIT
RESTORE ZERO/YES?
Yes
Scroll
22
Select
Select
No
Scroll
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
3.1
Before You Begin
Chapter 3
Calibration
Overview
This chapter describes the following procedures:
Characterization (Section 3.3)
•
Smart Meter Verification (Section 3.4)
•
Meter validation and adjusting meter factors (Section 3.5)
•
Density calibration (Section 3.6)
•
Temperature calibration (Section 3.7)
Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with
the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2
and 3.
3.2
Startup
•
Characterization, Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration
There are four procedures:
Characterization—adjusts the transmitter to compensate for the unique traits of the sensor
with which it is paired
•
Smart Meter Verification—establishing confidence in the sensor’s performance by analyzing
secondary variables that are highly correlated with flow and density calibration factors
•
Meter validation—confirming performance by comparing the sensor’s measurements to a
primary standard
•
Calibration—establishing the relationship between a process variable (flow, density, or
temperature) and the signal produced by the sensor
Calibration
•
Meter validation, characterization, and calibration are available on all Model 2700 transmitters. Smart
Meter Verification is available only if the Smart Meter Verification option was ordered with the
transmitter.
These four procedures are discussed and compared in Sections 3.2.1 through 3.2.5. Before performing
any of these procedures, review these sections to ensure that you will be performing the appropriate
procedure for your purposes.
Characterization
Characterizing the flowmeter adjusts the transmitter to compensate for the unique traits of the sensor
it is paired with. Characterization parameters (sometimes called “calibration factors”) describe the
sensor’s sensitivity to flow, density, and temperature.
Configuration and Use Manual
23
Configuration
3.2.1
Calibration
If the transmitter and the sensor were ordered together as a Coriolis flowmeter, then the flowmeter has
already been characterized. Under some circumstances (typically when pairing a sensor and
transmitter together for the first time), you may need to re-enter characterization data. If you are
unsure about whether you should characterize your flowmeter, contact Micro Motion Customer
Service.
3.2.2
Smart Meter Verification
Smart Meter Verification evaluates the structural integrity of the sensor tubes by comparing current
tube stiffness to the stiffness measured at the factory. Stiffness is defined as the load per unit
deflection, or force divided by displacement. Because a change in structural integrity changes the
sensor’s response to mass and density, this value can be used as an indicator of measurement
performance. Changes in tube stiffness are typically caused by erosion, corrosion, or tube damage.
Smart Meter Verification does not affect measurement in any way. Micro Motion recommends
performing Smart Meter Verification at regular intervals.
3.2.3
Meter validation and meter factors
Meter validation compares a measurement value reported by the transmitter with an external
measurement standard. Meter validation requires one data point.
Note: For meter validation to be useful, the external measurement standard must be more accurate
than the sensor. See the sensor’s product data sheet for its accuracy specification.
If the transmitter’s mass flow, volume flow, or density measurement is significantly different from the
external measurement standard, you may want to adjust the corresponding meter factor. A meter
factor is the value by which the transmitter multiplies the process variable value. The default meter
factors are 1.0, resulting in no difference between the data retrieved from the sensor and the data
reported externally.
Meter factors are typically used for proving the flowmeter against a weights and measures standard.
You may need to calculate and adjust meter factors periodically to comply with regulations.
3.2.4
Calibration
The flowmeter measures process variables based on fixed points of reference. Calibration adjusts
those points of reference. Three types of calibration can be performed:
•
Zero (see Section 2.7)
•
Density calibration
•
Temperature calibration
Density and temperature calibration require two data points (low and high) and an external
measurement for each. Calibration produces a change in the offset and/or the slope of the line that
represents the relationship between process density and the reported density value, or the relationship
between process temperature and the reported temperature value.
Note: For density or temperature calibration to be useful, the external measurements must be
accurate.
Flowmeters are calibrated at the factory, and normally do not need to be calibrated in the field.
Calibrate the flowmeter only if you must do so to meet regulatory requirements. Contact Micro
Motion before calibrating your flowmeter.
24
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
3.2.5
Comparison and recommendations
When choosing among Smart Meter Verification, meter validation, and calibration, consider the
following factors:
•
•
Process and measurement interruption
-
Smart Meter Verification provides an option that allows process measurement to continue
during the test.
-
Meter validation for density does not interrupt the process. However, meter validation for
mass flow or volume flow requires process down-time for the length of the test.
-
Calibration requires process down-time. In addition, density and temperature calibration
require replacing the process fluid with low-density and high density fluids, or
low-temperature and high-temperature fluids. Zero calibration requires stopping flow
through the sensor.
Startup
•
Before You Begin
Note: Micro Motion recommends using meter validation and meter factors, rather than calibration, to
prove the meter against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error.
External measurement requirements
-
Smart Meter Verification does not require external measurements.
-
Zero calibration does not require external measurements.
-
Density calibration, temperature calibration, and meter validation require external
measurements. For good results, the external measurement must be highly accurate.
Measurement adjustment
Smart Meter Verification is an indicator of sensor condition, but does not change
flowmeter internal measurement in any way.
-
Meter validation does not change flowmeter internal measurement in any way. If you
decide to adjust a meter factor as a result of a meter validation procedure, only the reported
measurement is changed—the base measurement is not changed. You can always reverse
the change by returning the meter factor to its previous value.
-
Calibration changes the transmitter’s interpretation of process data, and accordingly
changes the base measurement. If you perform a zero calibration, you can return to the
factory zero (or, if using ProLink II, the previous zero). However, if you perform a density
calibration or a temperature calibration, you cannot return to the previous calibration
factors unless you have manually recorded them.
Calibration
-
Micro Motion recommends obtaining the Smart Meter Verification transmitter option and performing
Smart Meter Verification on a regular basis.
3.3
Performing a characterization
Characterizing a flowmeter involves entering parameters that are printed on the sensor tag.
Configuration
3.3.1
Characterization parameters
The characterization parameters that must be entered depend on the sensor type: “T-Series” or
“Other,” as listed in Table 3-1. The “Other” category includes all Micro Motion sensors except
T-Series.
Configuration and Use Manual
25
Calibration
The characterization parameters are provided on the sensor tag. The format of the sensor tag varies
depending on your sensor’s date of purchase. See Figures 3-1 and 3-2 for illustrations of newer and
older sensor tags.
Table 3-1
Sensor calibration parameters
Sensor type
Characterization data
Fieldbus parameter
K1
K1
x
K2
K2
x
FD
FD
x
D1
D1
x
D2
x
Temp coeff (DT)
Temperature Coefficient
x
Flow cal
Flow Calibration Factor
FCF
Flow Calibration Factor
x
FT
Temperature Coefficient for Flow
x
FTG
T-Series Flow TG Coeff
x
FFQ
T-Series Flow FQ Coeff
x
DTG
T-Series Density TG Coeff
x
DFQ1
T-Series Density FQ Coeff 1
x
DFQ2
T-Series Density FQ Coeff 2
x
D2
(2)
T-Series
Other
x(1)
x(1)
x(1)
x(1)
x(1)
x(1)
x(3)
(1) See the section entitled “Density calibration factors.”
(2) On some sensor tags, shown as TC.
(3) See the section entitled “Flow calibration values.”
Figure 3-1
Sample calibration tags – All sensors except T-Series
Newer tag
19.0005.13
12502142824.44
12502.000
0.0010
14282.000
0.9980
4.44000
310
26
Older tag
19.0005.13
12500142864.44
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-2
Sample calibration tags – T-Series sensors
Before You Begin
Newer tag
Older tag
Density calibration factors
If your sensor tag does not show a D1 or D2 value:
For D1, enter the Dens A or D1 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the
line-condition density of the low-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses air.
•
For D2, enter the Dens B or D2 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the
line-condition density of the high-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses water.
Startup
•
If your sensor tag does not show a K1 or K2 value:
•
For K1, enter the first 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag in Figure 3-1,
this value is shown as 12500.
•
For K2, enter the second 5 digits of the density calibration factor. In the sample tag in
Figure 3-1, this value is shown as 14286.
If your sensor does not show an FD value, contact Micro Motion customer service.
If your sensor tag does not show a DT or TC value, enter the last 3 digits of the density calibration
factor. In the sample tag in Figure 3-1, this value is shown as 4.44.
Calibration
Flow calibration values
Two separate values are used to describe flow calibration: a 6-character FCF value and a 4-character
FT value. Both values contain decimal points. During characterization, these are entered as a single
10-character string that includes two decimal points. In ProLink II, this value is called the Flowcal
parameter; in the Communicator, it is called the FCF for T-Series sensors, and Flowcal for other
sensors.
To obtain the required value:
•
For older T-Series sensors, concatenate the FCF value and the FT value from the sensor tag, as
shown below.
Flow FCF X.XXXX
FT X.XX
For newer T-Series sensors, the 10-character string is represented on the sensor tag as the FCF
value. The value should be entered exactly as shown, including the decimal points. No
concatenation is required.
•
For all other sensors, the 10-character string is represented on the sensor tag as the Flow Cal
value. The value should be entered exactly as shown, including the decimal points. No
concatenation is required.
Configuration and Use Manual
27
Configuration
•
Calibration
3.3.2
How to characterize
To characterize the flowmeter, enter data from the sensor’s calibration tag into the transmitter
memory. You can characterize the transmitter with a fieldbus host (Figure 3-3) or ProLink II software
(Figure 3-4).
Note: You must configure the sensor type before you enter the characterization parameters.
Figure 3-3
Characterization – Fieldbus host
DEVICE
INFORMATION
Sensor Type Code
Sensor Type Code – Set to Curved Tube or Straight Tube to match sensor type.
CALIBRATION
*
*
– Set each of the fieldbus parameters shown in Table 3-1 to the value of the associated sensor data
printed on the sensor’s calibration tag.
Figure 3-4
Characterization – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Device
• Sensor type
Straight
tube
Curved
tube
Sensor type?
Flow
Flow
Density
Density
T Series Config
28
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
3.4
Performing Smart Meter Verification
3.4.1
Preparing for the Smart Meter Verification test
The Smart Meter Verification procedure can be performed on any process fluid. It is not necessary to
match factory conditions.
Before You Begin
Note: To use Smart Meter Verification, the transmitter must be paired with an enhanced core
processor, and the Smart Meter Verification option must be purchased for the transmitter.
During the test, process conditions must be stable. To maximize stability:
•
Maintain a constant temperature and pressure.
•
Avoid changes to fluid composition (e.g., two-phase flow, settling, etc.).
•
Maintain a constant flow. For higher test certainty, stop flow.
If stability varies outside test limits, the Smart Meter Verification procedure will be aborted. Verify
the stability of the process and retry the test.
Startup
Transmitter configuration
Smart Meter Verification is not affected by any parameters configured for flow, density, or
temperature. It is not necessary to change the transmitter configuration.
Control loops and process measurement
If the transmitter outputs will be set to Last Measured Value or Fault during the test, the outputs will
be fixed for two minutes. Disable all control loops for the duration of the test, and ensure that any data
reported during this period is handled appropriately.
3.4.2
Running the Smart Meter Verification test
To run a Smart Meter Verification test, refer to the procedures shown in Figures 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, and 3-8.
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
29
Calibration
Figure 3-5
Smart Meter Verification – Fieldbus host
DIAGNOSTIC
Start On-Line Smart Meter Verification
Start On-Line Smart
Meter Verification
– Method parameter that initiates the procedure below.
Step 1
Set output state (optional)
Step 2
Start/abort procedure
Manual abort (optional)
Step 3
Check current algorithm state
Running?
Yes (>0)
Step 4
Read percent complete
No (=0)
Step 8
Check abort code
No (<16)
Step 5
Check algorithm abort state
Able to
complete?
Yes (=16)
No (>0)
Step 6
Check inlet stiffness
Within limits?
Yes (=0)
Step 7
Check outlet stiffness
No (>0)
Within limits?
Yes (=0)
CAUTION
30
PASS
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Table 3-2
Fieldbus host interface for Smart Meter Verification
Parameters
1
Set output state
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 55
Value:
• 0: Last measured value (default)
• 1: Fault
2
Start/abort procedure
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 54 (Start/Stop Meter Verification)
• 0: Abort
• 1: Start
• 6: Start in Continue Measurement mode(1)
3
Check current algorithm state
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 57
4
Read percent complete
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 60 (Progress)
5
Check algorithm abort state
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 59
6
Check inlet stiffness
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 61
• 0: Within uncertainty limit
• 1: Outside uncertainty limit
7
Check outlet stiffness
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 62
• 0: Within uncertainty limit
• 1: Outside uncertainty limit
8
Read abort code
Block: Diagnostic
Index: 58
Codes: See Table 3-3
Startup
Step description
Before You Begin
Step number
(1) Setting Index 85 (Start On-Line Smart Meter Verification) to 1 is equivalent to setting Index 54 to 6.
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
31
Calibration
Figure 3-6
Smart Meter Verification – ProLink II
Tools >
Meter Verification >
Run Meter Verification
Verify configuration
parameters
View Previous Results
Next
Enter descriptive data
(optional)
Next
Configuration Changed
or Zero Changed?
No
Yes
View details (optional)
Select output behavior
Start Meter Verification
---------------------
Fail
Yes
Rerun
test?
Test result
No
Abort
Pass
Next
Back
Test result chart
Next
Report
Finish
32
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-7
Smart Meter Verification – Display
Before You Begin
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
ENTER METER VERFY
Select
RUN VERFY
Scroll
Select
RESULTS READ
Select
Scroll
SCHEDULE VERFY
EXIT
Scroll
Select
Scroll
Select
Startup
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
33
Calibration
Figure 3-8
Smart Meter Verification – Display
RUN VERFY
Select
OUTPUTS
EXIT
Scroll
Select
CONTINUE MEASR
FAULT
Scroll
Select
LAST VALUE
Scroll
Select
Scroll
EXIT
Select
ARE YOU SURE/YES?
Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x%
SENSOR ABORT/YES?
Select
Scroll
Pass
Select
Abort
Test result
Fail
PASS VERFY
CAUTION VERFY
ABORTED VERFY
Scroll
Scroll
Scroll
Abort Type
RESULTS VIEW/YES?
Scroll
Scroll
Select
RERUN/YES?
To Runcount
(see Results Read)
Yes
Correct condition
No
Scroll
To Enter Meter Verfy
Select
34
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
3.4.3
Reading and interpreting Smart Meter Verification test results
When the Smart Meter Verification test is completed, the result will be reported as Pass, Fail/Caution
(depending on the tool you are using), or Abort:
•
Pass – The test result is within the specification uncertainty limit. In other words, the stiffness
of the left and right pickoffs match the factory values plus or minus the specification
uncertainty limit. If transmitter zero and configuration match factory values, the sensor will
meet factory specifications for flow and density measurement. It is expected that meters will
pass Smart Meter Verification every time the test is run.
•
Fail/Caution – The test result is not within the specification uncertainty limit. Micro Motion
recommends that you immediately repeat the Smart Meter Verification test. If you previously
set outputs to Continue Measurement, change the setting to Last Measured Value or Fault.
Table 3-3
If the meter passes the second test, the first Fail/Caution result can be ignored.
-
If the meter fails the second test, the flow tubes may be damaged. Use your process
knowledge to determine the possibilities for damage and the appropriate actions for each.
These actions might include removing the meter from service and physically inspecting
the tubes. At minimum, you should perform a flow validation and a density calibration.
Startup
•
-
Before You Begin
Pass/Fail/Abort
Abort – A problem occurred with the Smart Meter Verification test (e.g., process instability).
Abort codes are listed in Table 3-3, and suggested actions are provided for each code.
Smart Meter Verification abort codes
Description
Suggested action
1
User-initiated abort
None required. Wait for 15 seconds before starting
another test.
3
Frequency drift
Ensure that temperature, flow, and density are stable,
and rerun the test.
5
High drive gain
Ensure that flow is stable, minimize entrained gas, and
rerun the test.
8
Unstable flow
Review the suggestions for stable flow in Section 3.4.1
and rerun the test.
13
No factory reference data for Smart
Meter Verification test performed on air
Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the
abort code.
14
No factory reference data for Smart
Meter Verification test performed on
water
Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the
abort code.
15
No configuration data for Smart Meter
Verification
Contact Micro Motion customer service and provide the
abort code.
Other
General abort
Repeat the test. If the test aborts again, contact
Micro Motion customer service and provide the abort
code.
Calibration
Abort code
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
35
Calibration
Detailed test data with ProLink II
For each test, the following data is stored on the transmitter:
•
Powered-on seconds at the time of the test
•
Test result
•
Stiffness of the left and right pickoffs, shown as percentage variation from the factory value. If
the test aborted, 0 is stored for these values.
•
Abort code, if applicable
ProLink II stores additional descriptive information for each test in a database on the local PC,
including:
•
Timestamp from the PC clock
•
Current flowmeter identification data
•
Current flow and density configuration parameters
•
Current zero values
•
Current process values for mass flow rate, volume flow rate, density, temperature, and external
pressure
•
(Optional) User-entered customer and test descriptions
If you run a Smart Meter Verification test from ProLink II, ProLink II first checks for new test results
on the transmitter and synchronizes the local database if required. During this step, ProLink II
displays the following message:
Synchronizing x out of y
Please wait
Note: If you request an action while synchronization is in process, ProLink II displays a message
asking whether or not you want to complete synchronization. If you choose No, the ProLink II
database may not include the latest test results from the transmitter.
Test results are available at the end of each test, in the following forms:
•
A test result chart (see Figure 3-9).
•
A test report that includes the descriptive information for the current test, the test result chart,
and background information about Smart Meter Verification. You can export this report to an
HTML file or print it to the default printer.
Note: To view the chart and the report for previous tests without running a test, click View Previous
Test Results and Print Report from the first Smart Meter Verification panel. See Figure 3-9. Test
reports are available only for tests initiated from ProLink II.
36
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-9
Test result chart
Before You Begin
Initiated from the display or other tool
Initiated from ProLink II
Startup
Calibration
The test result chart shows the results for all tests in the ProLink II database, plotted against the
specification uncertainty limit. The inlet stiffness and the outlet stiffness are plotted separately. This
helps to distinguish between local and uniform changes to the sensor tubes.
This chart supports trend analysis, which can be helpful in detecting meter problems before they
become severe.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
37
Calibration
Note the following:
•
The test result chart may not show all test results, and test counters may not be continuous.
ProLink II stores information about all tests initiated from ProLink II and all tests available on
the transmitter when the test database is synchronized. However, the transmitter stores only the
twenty most recent test results. To ensure a complete result set, always use ProLink II to
initiate the tests, or synchronize the ProLink II database before overwriting occurs.
•
The chart uses different symbols to differentiate between tests initiated from ProLink II and
tests initiated using a different tool. A test report is available only for tests that were initiated
from ProLink II.
•
You can double-click the chart to manipulate the presentation in a variety of ways (change
titles, change fonts, colors, borders and gridlines, etc.), and to export the data to additional
formats (including “to printer”).
•
You can export this chart to a CSV file for use in external applications.
Detailed test data with the display
For each Smart Meter Verification test, the following data is stored on the transmitter:
•
Powered-on seconds at the time of the test
•
Test result
•
Stiffness of the left and right pickoffs, shown as percentage variation from the factory value. If
the test aborted, 0 is stored for these values.
•
Abort code, if applicable
To view this data, see Figures 3-6 and 3-10.
38
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-10 Smart Meter Verification test data – Display
Before You Begin
RESULTS READ
Select
RUNCOUNT x
Select
Pass
Result type
Scroll
Abort
Fail
CAUTION
Abort Type
Select
Select
Select
xx L STF%
xx L STF%
Select
Select
xx R STF%
xx R STF%
Select
Select
Startup
PASS
Calibration
xx SEC
RESULTS MORE?
Select
To Runcount x-1
Scroll
To Run Verfy
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
39
Calibration
3.4.4
Setting up automatic or remote execution of the Smart Meter Verification test
There are two ways to execute a Smart Meter Verification test automatically:
•
Set up a one-time automatic execution
•
Set up a recurring execution
To set up a one-time automatic execution, set up a recurring execution, view the number of hours until
the next scheduled test, or delete a schedule:
-
With ProLink II, choose Tools > Meter Verification > Schedule Meter Verification.
-
With the display, see Figures 3-6 and 3-11.
-
With a fieldbus host, Smart Meter Verification scheduling resides in the Diagnostic
transducer block. See Figure 3-12.
Note the following:
40
•
If you are setting up a one-time automatic execution, specify the start time as a number of
hours from the present time. For example, if the present time is 2:00 and you specify 3.5 hours,
the test will be initiated at 5:30.
•
If you are setting up a recurring execution, specify the number of hours to elapse between
executions. The first test will be initiated when the specified number of hours has elapsed, and
testing will be repeated at the same interval until the schedule is deleted. For example, if the
present time is 2:00 and you specify 2 hours, the first test will be initiated at 4:00, the next at
6:00, and so on.
•
If you delete the schedule, both the one-time execution and the recurring execution settings are
deleted.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-11 Smart Meter Verification scheduler – Display
Before You Begin
SCHEDULE VERFY
Select
No
Schedule set?
Yes
SCHED IS OFF
TURN OFF SCHED/YES?
Scroll
Scroll
Select
Schedule deleted
HOURS LEFT
Startup
Scroll
Select
xx HOURS
Select
SET NEXT
Scroll
SET RECUR
Select
xx HOURS
xx HOURS
SAVE/YES?
SAVE/YES?
No
No
Scroll
Yes
Select
Scroll
Scroll
Select
Calibration
Select
EXIT
Scroll
Yes
Select
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
41
Calibration
Figure 3-12 Smart Meter Verification scheduler – Fieldbus host
DIAGNOSTIC
Time Until First Run
Time Between Each Run
Time Until Next Run
3.5
Time Until First Run
– Number of hours to wait before starting Smart Meter Verification
Time Between
Each Run
– Number of hours to wait between each Smart Meter Verification test, after the
first test is completed
Time Until Next Run
– Number of hours until the next Smart Meter Verification test begins
Performing meter validation
To perform meter validation, measure a sample of the process fluid and compare the measurement
with the flowmeter’s reported value.
Use the following formula to calculate a meter factor:
ExternalStandard
NewMeterFactor = ConfiguredMeterFactor  ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------ActualTransmitterMeasurement
Valid values for meter factors range from 0.8 to 1.2. If the calculated meter factor exceeds these
limits, contact Micro Motion customer service.
Example
The flowmeter is installed and proved for the first time. The flowmeter
mass measurement is 250.27 lb; the reference device measurement is
250 lb. A mass flow meter factor is determined as follows:
250
MassFlowMeterFactor = 1  ------------------ = 0.9989
250.27
The first mass flow meter factor is 0.9989.
One year later, the flowmeter is proved again. The flowmeter mass
measurement is 250.07 lb; the reference device measurement is
250.25 lb. A new mass flow meter factor is determined as follows:
250.25
MassFlowMeterFactor = 0.9989  ------------------ = 0.9996
250.07
The new mass flow meter factor is 0.9996.
You can adjust meter factors with a fieldbus host (Figure 3-13), ProLink II (Figure 3-14), or the
display (Figure 3-15).
42
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-13 Meter factors – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
Mass Meter Factor
MEASUREMENT
Volume Meter Factor
Density Meter Factor
Mass Meter Factor
– Set to the meter factor for mass flow.
Volume Meter Factor
– Set to the meter factor for volume flow.
Density Meter Factor
– Set to the meter factor for density.
Figure 3-14 Meter factors – ProLink II
Startup
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
Set values:
• Mass Factor
• Dens Factor
• Vol Factor
Calibration
Apply
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
43
Calibration
Figure 3-15 Meter factors – Display
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
FACTOR MASS
Select
Scroll
Scroll
FACTOR VOL
CONFG
Scroll
Select
Select
Scroll
FACTOR DENS
Scroll
Scroll
MTR F
3.6
EXIT
Performing a density calibration
Density calibration includes the following calibration points:
•
•
All sensors:
-
D1 calibration (low-density)
-
D2 calibration (high-density)
T-Series sensors only:
-
D3 calibration (optional)
-
D4 calibration (optional)
For T-Series sensors, the optional D3 and D4 calibrations could improve the accuracy of the density
measurement. If you choose to perform the D3 and D4 calibrations:
•
Do not perform the D1 or D2 calibrations.
•
Perform the D3 calibration if you have one calibrated fluid.
•
Perform both the D3 and D4 calibrations if you have two calibrated fluids (other than air
and water).
The calibrations that you choose must be performed without interruption, in the order listed here.
Note: Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. If you are using
ProLink II, you can do this by saving the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration
fails, restore the known values.
44
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
3.6.1
Preparing for density calibration
Before You Begin
Before beginning density calibration, review the requirements in this section.
Sensor requirements
During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow
through the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually
accomplished by closing the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with
the appropriate fluid.
Density calibration fluids
D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low density) fluid and a D2 (high density) fluid. You may
use air and water. If you are calibrating a T-Series sensor, the D1 fluid must be air and the D2 fluid
must be water.
CAUTION
Startup
For T-Series sensors, the D1 calibration must be performed on air and the
D2 calibration must be performed on water.
For D3 density calibration, the D3 fluid must meet the following requirements:
•
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm3
•
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm3 between the density of the D3 fluid and the density of water.
The density of the D3 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water.
For D4 density calibration, the D4 fluid must meet the following requirements:
Minimum density of 0.6 g/cm3
•
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm3 between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of the D3
fluid. The density of the D4 fluid must be greater than the density of the D3 fluid.
•
Minimum difference of 0.1 g/cm3 between the density of the D4 fluid and the density of water.
The density of the D4 fluid may be either greater or less than the density of water
3.6.2
Calibration
•
Density calibration procedures
To perform a D1 and D2 density calibration:
•
With a fieldbus host, see Figure 3-16.
•
With ProLink II, see Figure 3-17.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
45
Calibration
Figure 3-16 D1 and D2 calibration – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Low Density Calibration
High Density Calibration
Low Density Calibration
– Method parameter that initiates the D1 procedure below.
High Density Calibration
Method parameter that initiates the D2 procedure below.
D1 calibration
Close shutoff valve downstream
from sensor
• If calibration fails, see
Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting
information.
D2 calibration
Low Density Calibration
High Density Calibration
Next
Next
Fill sensor completely
with low-density fluid
Fill sensor completely
with high-density fluid
Next
Next
Enter the density of
the calibration fluid
Enter the density of
the calibration fluid
Next
Next
Calibration in progress
Calibration in progress
Finish
46
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-17 D1 and D2 calibration – ProLink II
Close shutoff valve
downstream from sensor
Before You Begin
D1 calibration
D2 calibration
Fill sensor with D1 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 1
Fill sensor with D2 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 2
Enter density of D2 fluid
Do Cal
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Close
Close
Startup
Enter density of D1 fluid
Done
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
47
Calibration
Figure 3-18 D3 (or D3 and D4) calibration (T-Series only) – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
D3 Density Calibration
D4 Density Calibration
D3 Density Calibration
– Method parameter that initiates the D3 procedure below.
D4 Density Calibration
Method parameter that initiates the D4 procedure below.
D3 calibration
Close shutoff valve downstream
from sensor
• If calibration fails, see
Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting
information.
48
D4 calibration
D3 Density Calibration
D4 Density Calibration
Next
Next
Fill sensor completely
with D3 fluid
Fill sensor completely
with D4 fluid
Next
Next
Enter the density of
the calibration fluid
Enter the density of
the calibration fluid
Next
Next
Calibration in progress
Calibration in progress
Finish
Finish
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-19 D3 (or D3 and D4) calibration – ProLink II
Close shutoff valve
downstream from sensor
Before You Begin
D3 calibration
D4 calibration
Fill sensor with D3 fluid
Fill sensor with D4 fluid
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 4
Enter density of D3 fluid
Enter density of D4 fluid
Do Cal
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Startup
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Density cal – Point 3
Close
Close
Done
Done
Calibration
• If calibration fails, see
Section 6.5 for troubleshooting
information.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
49
Calibration
3.7
Performing a temperature calibration
Temperature calibration is a two-point procedure: temperature offset calibration and temperature
slope calibration. The entire procedure must be completed without interruption.
You can calibrate for temperature with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Figure 3-20 Temperature calibration – Fieldbus host
CALIBRATION
Temp Low Calibration
Temp High Calibration
Temp Low Calibration
Temp High Calibration
– Method parameter that initiates the low-temperature procedure below.
Method parameter that initiates the high-temperature procedure below.
Temp Low Calibration
Temp High Calibration
Next
Next
Fill sensor completely
with low-temperature
fluid
Fill sensor completely
with high-temperature
fluid
Allow sensor to
achieve equilibrium
Allow sensor to
achieve equilibrium
Enter the temperature
of the calibration fluid
Enter the temperature
of the calibration fluid
Next
Next
Calibration in progress
Calibration in progress
• If calibration fails,
see Section 6.5 for
troubleshooting
information.
Finish
50
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Calibration
Figure 3-21 Temperature calibration – ProLink II
Temperature Slope calibration
Fill sensor with lowtemperature fluid
Fill sensor with hightemperature fluid
Wait until sensor achieves
thermal equilibrium
Wait until sensor achieves
thermal equilibrium
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Temp offset cal
Before You Begin
Temperature Offset calibration
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Temp slope cal
Enter temperature of hightemperature fluid
Do Cal
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Close
Close
Startup
Enter temperature of lowtemperature fluid
Done
Calibration
• If calibration fails, see
Section 6.5 for troubleshooting
information.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
51
52
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
4.1
Before You Begin
Chapter 4
Configuration
Overview
This chapter describes how to change the operating settings of the transmitter.
Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with
the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2
and 3.
Configuration map
Use this configuration map to guide you through a complete or partial configuration of the transmitter.
Table 4-1
Startup
4.2
Configuration map
Method
Topic
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Gas standard volume
x
x
Measurement units
x
x
Special measurement units
x
x
4.5
Petroleum measurement application
x
x
4.6
Concentration measurement application
x
x
4.7
Linearization
x
4.8
Output scale
x
4.9
Process alarms
x
4.10
Alarm severity
x
x
4.11
Damping
x
x
4.12
Slug flow
x
x
4.13
Cutoffs
x
x
4.14
Flow direction
x
x
4.15
Device settings
x
x
4.16
Sensor parameters
x
x
4.17
Display functionality
x
x
PlantWeb Alert timeout
x
x
Write-protect mode
x
x
x
4.19
x
x
4.20
4.3
x
x
4.4
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
Section
Calibration
LD Optimization
Display
4.18
4-54
53
Configuration
4.3
Configuring standard volume flow measurement for gas
Two types of volume flow measurement are available:
•
Liquid volume (the default)
•
Gas standard volume
Only one type of volume flow measurement can be performed at a time (i.e., if liquid volume flow
measurement is enabled, gas standard volume flow measurement is disabled, and vice versa).
Different sets of volume flow measurement units are available, depending on which type of volume
flow measurement is enabled. If you want to use a gas volume flow unit, additional configuration is
required.
Note: If you will use the petroleum measurement application or the concentration measurement
application, liquid volume flow measurement is required.
Gas standard volume flow can be configured with a fieldbus host or ProLink II. In either case, you
must:
•
Enable gas standard volume flow
•
Specify the standard density (density at reference conditions) of your gas
•
Select the measurement unit to use (see Section 4.4)
•
Set the low flow cutoff value (see Section 4.14)
Note: The display will allow you to select a volume measurement unit from the set available for the
configured volume flow type, but it will not allow you to configure gas standard volume flow.
Figure 4-1
GSV – Fieldbus host
MEASUREMENT
Enable Gas Standard Volume
Enable Gas Standard Volume – Set to Enable to set volume flow to use gas standard volume. Set to
Disable to use liquid volume flow.
54
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-2
GSV – ProLink II
Before You Begin
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
Set Vol Flow Type to
Std Gas Volume
Apply
Startup
4.3.1
Configuring gas density
You have two choices for entering the standard density of the gas you are going to measure (i.e., the
density of the gas at reference conditions):
•
If you know the standard density, you can enter that value into the transmitter. For optimal
standard volume measurement accuracy, be sure the standard density you enter is correct and
fluid composition is stable. You can enter the gas density with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
•
If you do not know the standard density of the gas, and you are using ProLink II, you can use
the Gas Wizard. The Gas Wizard can calculate the standard density of the gas that you are
measuring.
Gas density – Fieldbus host
Calibration
Figure 4-3
MEASUREMENT
Gas Density
Gas Density – Set to the standard density of the gas you are going to measure.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
55
Configuration
Figure 4-4
Gas density – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
Set Std Gas Density
to the appropriate
value
Apply
Figure 4-5
Gas Wizard – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Enter new values for
temperature and
pressure
Flow tab
Gas Wizard
Gas listed in
Choose Gas list?
Reference
values correct?
No
Select Enter Other
Gas Property
No
Change Reference
Conditions
Yes
Next
Select gas description
method:
• Molecular weight
• Specific gravity
compared to air
• Density
Yes
Select Choose Gas
Finish
Provide required
information
Select your gas from
the list
Next
56
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
4.4
Changing the measurement units
•
Because ProLink II and the display store and retrieve the units stored in the MEASUREMENT
block, configuring units using ProLink II or the display will not update the AI and AO blocks.
Affected AI and AO blocks will get a configuration error if units are changed in the
MEASUREMENT block but not in the AI or AO block.
•
Configuring the units in the MEASUREMENT block with a fieldbus host will produce the
same results as if the units had been changed using ProLink II or the display (i.e., the related
AI or AO blocks will get a configuration error unless their units are also changed).
•
Configuring the units in an AI or AO block using a fieldbus host will cause the units in
ProLink II and on the display to be updated correctly.
Startup
Measurement units can be changed with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, and the display. Refer to Tables
4-2 through 4-7 for complete lists of the units you can set for each process variable.
Before You Begin
The transmitter stores measurement units in three different places: the MEASUREMENT transducer
block, the AI blocks, and the AO block. If you configure the measurement units in the AI or AO
blocks, the MEASUREMENT block will be automatically updated. However, if you configure the
units only in the MEASUREMENT block, the AI and AO blocks will not be updated. This results in
the following behaviors:
Note: When the transmitter is configured for liquid volume flow, only liquid volume units are
available (Table 4-3). When the transmitter is configured for gas volume flow, only gas volume units
are available (Table 4-4).
Note: Changing the measurement units for a process variable automatically changes the associated
totalizer units as well. For example, setting the mass flow units to g/s will automatically set the mass
totalizer unit to grams.
Figure 4-6
Changing measurement units – Fieldbus host
Calibration
AI
Transducer Scale: Units Index
Transducer Scale: Units Index
– Set to the desired measurement units.
AO
Configuration
Process Value Scale: Units Index
Process Value Scale: Units Index – Set to the desired measurement units.
Configuration and Use Manual
57
Configuration
Figure 4-7
Changing measurement units – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Density tab
Select unit from Dens
Units list
Apply
Flow tab
Select unit from Vol
Flow Units(1) list
Temperature tab
Select unit from Mass
Flow Units list
Apply
Select unit from
Temp Units list
Apply
(1) If volume flow type is configured to gas standard volume, this list will appear as Std gas vol flow units.
Note: You must also change the units in the appropriate AI block. Failure to do so will cause
the AI block to get a configuration error.
58
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-8
Changing measurement units – Display
Before You Begin
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
MASS
Select
Scroll
Scroll
VOL(1)
CONFG
Scroll
Select
Select
Startup
DENS
UNITS
Scroll
TEMP
Scroll
PRESS
(1) If volume flow type is configured to gas standard volume, this list will appear as GSV.
Calibration
Note: You must also change the units in the appropriate AI block. Failure to do so will cause the
AI block to get a configuration error.
Table 4-2
Mass flow measurement units
Mass flow unit
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
g/s
g/s
G/S
Grams per second
g/min
g/min
G/MIN
Grams per minute
g/h
g/hr
G/H
Grams per hour
kg/s
kg/s
KG/S
Kilograms per second
kg/min
kg/min
KG/MIN
Kilograms per minute
kg/h
kg/hr
KG/H
Kilograms per hour
kg/d
kg/day
KG/D
Kilograms per day
t/min
mTon/min
T/MIN
Metric tons per minute
t/h
mTon/hr
T/H
Metric tons per hour
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
Fieldbus host
59
Configuration
Table 4-2
Mass flow measurement units (continued)
Mass flow unit
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
t/d
mTon/day
T/D
Metric tons per day
lb/s
lbs/s
LB/S
Pounds per second
lb/min
lbs/min
LB/MIN
Pounds per minute
lb/h
lbs/hr
LB/H
Pounds per hour
lb/d
lbs/day
LB/D
Pounds per day
STon/min
sTon/min
ST/MIN
Short tons (2000 pounds) per minute
STon/h
sTon/hr
ST/H
Short tons (2000 pounds) per hour
STon/d
sTon/day
ST/D
Short tons (2000 pounds) per day
LTon/h
lTon/hr
LT/H
Long tons (2240 pounds) per hour
LTon/d
lTon/day
LT/D
Long tons (2240 pounds) per day
Table 4-3
Volume flow measurement units – Liquid
Volume flow unit
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
CFS
ft3/sec
CUFT/S
Cubic feet per second
CFM
ft3/min
CUF/MN
Cubic feet per minute
CFH
ft3/hr
CUFT/H
Cubic feet per hour
ft3/d
ft3/day
CUFT/D
Cubic feet per day
3
m /s
m3/sec
M3/S
Cubic meters per second
3
m3/min
M3/MIN
Cubic meters per minute
3
m3/hr
M3/H
Cubic meters per hour
3
m /d
m3/day
M3/D
Cubic meters per day
gal/s
US gal/sec
USGPS
U.S. gallons per second
GPM
US gal/min
USGPM
U.S. gallons per minute
gal/h
US gal/hr
USGPH
U.S. gallons per hour
gal/d
US gal/d
USGPD
U.S. gallons per day
Mgal/d
mil US gal/day
MILG/D
Million U.S. gallons per day
L/s
l/sec
L/S
Liters per second
L/min
l/min
L/MIN
Liters per minute
L/h
l/hr
L/H
Liters per hour
ML/d
mil l/day
MILL/D
Million liters per day
ImpGal/s
Imp gal/sec
UKGPS
Imperial gallons per second
ImpGal/min
Imp gal/min
UKGPM
Imperial gallons per minute
ImpGal/h
Imp gal/hr
UKGPH
Imperial gallons per hour
ImpGal/d
Imp gal/day
UKGPD
Imperial gallons per day
bbl/s
barrels/sec
BBL/S
Barrels per second(1)
bbl/min
barrels/min
BBL/MN
Barrels per minute(1)
bbl/h
barrels/hr
BBL/H
Barrels per hour(1)
m /min
m /h
60
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Table 4-3
Volume flow measurement units – Liquid (continued)
Before You Begin
Volume flow unit
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
bbl/d
barrels/day
BBL/D
Barrels per day(1)
Bbl (US Beer)/d
Beer barrels/sec
BBBL/S
Beer barrels per second(2)
Bbl (US Beer)/min
Beer barrels/min
BBBL/MN
Beer barrels per minute(2)
Bbl (US Beer)/h
Beer barrels/hr
BBBL/H
Beer barrels per hour(2)
Bbl (US Beer)/d
Beer barrels/day
BBBL/D
Beer barrels per day(2)
(1) Unit based on oil barrels (42 U.S. gallons).
(2) Unit based on U.S. beer barrels (31 U.S. gallons).
Table 4-4
Volume flow measurement units – Gas
Volume flow unit
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
3
Nm3/sec
NM3/S
Normal cubic meters per second
3
Nm3/min
NM3/MN
Normal cubic meters per minute
3
Nm3/hr
NM3/H
Normal cubic meters per hour
3
Nm /d
Nm3/day
NM3/D
Normal cubic meters per day
NL/s
NLPS
NLPS
Normal liter per second
Nm /s
Nm /min
Nm /h
NL/min
NLPM
NLPM
Normal liter per minute
NL/h
NLPH
NLPH
Normal liter per hour
NL/d
NLPD
NLPD
Normal liter per day
SCFM
SCFM
SCFM
Standard cubic feet per minute
SCFH
SCFH
Standard cubic feet per hour
Sm3/S
SM3/S
Standard cubic meters per second
3
Sm3/min
SM3/MN
Standard cubic meters per minute
3
Sm3/hr
SM3/H
Standard cubic meters per hour
3
Sm /d
Sm3/day
SM3/D
Standard cubic meters per day
SL/s
SLPS
SLPS
Standard liter per second
SL/min
SLPM
SLPM
Standard liter per minute
SL/h
SLPH
SLPH
Standard liter per hour
SL/d
SLPD
SLPD
Standard liter per day
Sm /s
Sm /min
Sm /h
Table 4-5
Calibration
SCFH
3
Startup
Fieldbus host
Density measurement units
Density unit
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
g/cm3
G/CM3
Grams per cubic centimeter
g/L
g/l
G/L
Grams per liter
g/ml
g/ml
G/ML
Grams per milliliter
kg/L
kg/l
KG/L
Kilograms per liter
g/cm
3
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
Fieldbus host
61
Configuration
Table 4-5
Density measurement units (continued)
Density unit
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
kg/m3
kg/m3
KG/M3
Kilograms per cubic meter
lb/gal
lbs/Usgal
LB/GAL
Pounds per U.S. gallon
lb/ft3
lbs/ft3
LB/CUF
Pounds per cubic foot
lbs/in3
LB/CUI
Pounds per cubic inch
STon/yd
sT/yd3
ST/CUY
Short ton per cubic yard
degAPI
degAPI
D API
Degrees API
SGU
SGU
SGU
Specific gravity unit (not temperature
corrected)
3
lb/in
3
Table 4-6
Temperature measurement units
Temperature unit
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
°C
°F
°R
°C
°F
°R
°K
°C
°F
°R
°K
Degrees Celsius
K
Degrees Fahrenheit
Degrees Rankine
Kelvin
Although pressure units are listed in the following table, the transmitter does not measure pressure.
These units are for configuring external pressure compensation. Refer to Section 2.5.
Table 4-7
Pressure measurement units
Pressure unit
62
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
ftH20 (68°F)
Ft Water @ 68°F
FTH2O
Feet water @ 68 °F
inH2O (4°C)
In Water @ 4°C
INW4C
Inches water @ 4 °C
inH20 (68°F)
In Water @ 68°F
INH2O
Inches water @ 68 °F
mmH2O (4°C)
mm Water @ 4°C
mmW4C
Millimeters water @ 4 °C
mmH20 (68°F)
mm Water @ 68°F
mmH2O
Millimeters water @ 68 °F
inHg (0°C)
In Mercury @ 0°C
INHG
Inches mercury @ 0 °C
mmHg (0°C)
mm Mercury @ 0°C
mmHG
Millimeters mercury @ 0 °C
psi
PSI
PSI
Pounds per square inch
bar
bar
BAR
Bar
mbar
millibar
mBAR
Millibar
g/cm2
g/cm2
G/SCM
Grams per square centimeter
kg/cm2
kg/cm2
KG/SCM
Kilograms per square centimeter
Pa
pascals
PA
Pascals
MPa
megapascals
MPA
Megapascals
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Table 4-7
Pressure measurement units (continued)
Before You Begin
Pressure unit
4.5
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display
Unit description
kPa
Kilopascals
KPA
Kilopascals
torr
Torr @ 0C
TORR
Torr @ 0 °C
atm
atms
ATM
Atmospheres
Creating special measurement units
If you need to use a non-standard unit of measure, you can create special measurement units. There
are two methods available for creating special units:
Using the special unit features of the MEASUREMENT transducer block. This method is
described in this section.
•
Using the Transducer Scale, Output Scale, and Linearization parameters of an AI function
block. This method is not described in this section. Refer to Sections 4.8 and 4.9, and the
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks manual, available from the Rosemount web site
(www.rosemount.com), for information about creating special units using this method.
Startup
•
The MEASUREMENT transducer block supports one special unit for mass flow, one special
measurement unit for liquid volume flow, and one special unit for gas volume flow. Special
measurement units consist of:
•
Base unit — A combination of:
-
Base mass or base volume unit — A standard measurement unit that the transmitter
already recognizes (e.g., kg, m3)
-
Base time unit — A unit of time that the transmitter already recognizes
(e.g., seconds, days)
Conversion factor — The number by which the base unit will be divided to convert to the
special unit
•
Special unit — A non-standard volume-flow or mass-flow unit of measure that you want to be
reported by the transmitter.
The terms above are related by the following formulae:
Calibration
•
x  Base units  = y  Special units 
x  Base units 
Conversion factor = -----------------------------------------y  Special units 
To create a special unit, you must:
Configuration
1. Identify the simplest base volume or mass and base time units for your special unit. For
example, to create the special volume flow unit pints per minute, the simplest base units are
gallons per minute:
a. Base volume unit: gallon
b. Base time unit: minute
Configuration and Use Manual
63
Configuration
2. Calculate the conversion factor:
1 gallon per minute
--------------------------------------------------- = 0.125
8 pints per minute
3. Name the new special mass-flow or volume-flow measurement unit and its corresponding
totalizer measurement unit:
a. Special volume-flow measurement unit name: pint/min
b. Volume totalizer measurement unit name: pints
Note: Special measurement unit names can be up to 8 characters long, but only the first 5 characters
appear on the display.
Special units can be created with a fieldbus host or with ProLink II.
Figure 4-9
Special units for mass flow – Fieldbus host
Mass flow special units base
Mass flow special units time
MEASUREMENT
Mass flow special units conv
Mass flow special units str
Mass Tot/Inv Special Unit Str
64
Mass flow special units base
– Set to a mass unit.
Mass flow special units time
– Set to a unit of time.
Mass flow special units conv
– Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the
transmitter will use normal mass units. When this parameter is
not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special mass units.
Mass flow special units str
– Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8
characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).
Mass Tot/Inv Special Unit Str
– Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up
to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-10 Special units for liquid volume flow – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
Vol flow special units base
Vol flow special units time
MEASUREMENT
Vol flow special units conv
Vol flow special units str
Volume Tot/Inv Special Unit Str
– Set to a liquid volume unit.
Vol flow special units time
– Set to a unit of time.
Vol flow special units conv
– Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the
transmitter will use normal liquid volume units. When this
parameter is not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special liquid
volume units.
Vol flow special units str
– Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8
characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).
Volume Tot/Inv Special Unit Str
– Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up
to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).
Startup
Vol flow special units base
Figure 4-11 Special units for gas volume flow – Fieldbus host
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Base
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Time
MEASUREMENT
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Factor
Calibration
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Text
Std Gas Vol Total Special Units Text
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Base – Set to a gas volume unit.
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Time
– Set to a unit of time.
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Factor – Set to the conversion factor. When this parameter equals 1, the
transmitter will use normal gas volume units. When this
parameter is not equal to 1, the transmitter will use special gas
volume units.
– Set to the name of the special unit. Unit names can be up to 8
characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).
Std Gas Vol Total Special Units Text
– Set to the name of the special totalizer unit. Unit names can be up
to 8 characters in length (although only the first 5 are displayed).
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
Std Gas Vol Flow Special Units Text
65
Configuration
Figure 4-12 Special mass and volume units – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
(1) These labels are slightly different when volume flow
is configured for gas standard volume: Base Gas Vol
Unit, Base Gas Vol Time, Gas Vol Flow Conv Fact,
Gas Vol Flow Text, and Gas Vol Total Text.
Special Units tab
Special mass unit
Special volume unit
Set the base, time, and
conversion factor:
• Base Mass Unit
• Base Mass Time
• Mass Flow Conv Fact
Set the base, time, and
conversion factor:
• Base Vol Unit(1)
• Base Vol Time(1)
• Vol Flow Conv Fact(1)
Set the unit names:
• Mass Flow Text
• Mass Total Text
Set the unit names:
• Vol Flow Text(1)
• Vol Total Text(1)
Apply
4.6
Configuring the petroleum measurement application (API feature)
The API parameters determine the values that will be used in API-related calculations. The API
parameters are available only if the petroleum measurement application is enabled on your
transmitter.
Note: The petroleum measurement application requires liquid volume measurement units. If you plan
to use API process variables, ensure that liquid volume flow measurement is specified. See
Section 4.3.
4.6.1
About the petroleum measurement application
Some applications that measure liquid volume flow or liquid density are particularly sensitive to
temperature factors, and must comply with American Petroleum Institute (API) standards for
measurement. The petroleum measurement application enables Correction of Temperature on volume
of Liquids, or CTL.
66
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Terms and definitions
•
API – American Petroleum Institute
•
CTL – Correction of Temperature on volume of Liquids. The CTL value is used to calculate
the VCF value
•
TEC – Thermal Expansion Coefficient
•
VCF – Volume Correction Factor. The correction factor to be applied to volume process
variables. VCF can be calculated after CTL is derived
Before You Begin
The following terms and definitions are relevant to the petroleum measurement application:
CTL derivation methods
There are two derivation methods for CTL:
•
Method 1 is based on observed density and observed temperature.
•
Method 2 is based on a user-supplied reference density (or thermal expansion coefficient, in
some cases) and observed temperature.
Startup
Petroleum Measurement reference tables
Reference tables are organized by reference temperature, CTL derivation method, liquid type, and
density unit. The table selected here controls all the remaining options.
•
•
•
-
If you specify a 5x, 6x, 23x, or 24x table, the default reference temperature is 60 °F, and
cannot be changed.
-
If you specify a 53x or 54x table, the default reference temperature is 15 °C. However, you
can change the reference temperature, as recommended in some locations (for example, to
14.0 or 14.5 °C).
CTL derivation method:
-
If you specify an odd-numbered table (5, 23, or 53), CTL will be derived using method 1
described above.
-
If you specify an even-numbered table (6, 24, or 54), CTL will be derived using method 2
described above.
The letters A, B, C, or D that are used to terminate table names define the type of liquid that the
table is designed for:
-
A tables are used with generalized crude and JP4 applications.
-
B tables are used with generalized products.
-
C tables are used with liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion
coefficient.
-
D tables are used with lubricating oils.
Calibration
•
Reference temperature:
Different tables use different density units:
Degrees API
-
Relative density (SG)
-
Base density (kg/m3)
Configuration
-
Table 4-8 summarizes these options.
Configuration and Use Manual
67
Configuration
Table 4-8
Petroleum Measurement reference temperature tables
Table
CTL
derivation
method
Density unit and range
Base temperature
Degrees API
5A
Method 1
60 °F, non-configurable
0 to +100
5B
Method 1
60 °F, non-configurable
0 to +85
5D
Method 1
60 °F, non-configurable
–10 to +40
23A
Method 1
60 °F, non-configurable
0.6110 to 1.0760
23B
Method 1
60 °F, non-configurable
0.6535 to 1.0760
23D
Method 1
60 °F, non-configurable
Base density
Relative density
0.8520 to 1.1640
3
53A
Method 1
15 °C, configurable
610 to 1075 kg/m
53B
Method 1
15 °C, configurable
653 to 1075 kg/m3
53D
Method 1
15 °C, configurable
825 to 1164 kg/m3
Reference temperature
Supports
6C
Method 2
60 °F, non-configurable
60 °F
Degrees API
24C
Method 2
60 °F, non-configurable
60 °F
Relative density
54C
Method 2
15 °C, configurable
15 °C
Base density in kg/m3
4.6.2
Configuration procedure
The PM configuration parameters are listed and defined in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9
Petroleum Measurement parameters
Variable
Description
Table type
Specifies the table that will be used for reference temperature and reference density unit. Select
the table that matches your requirements. See Petroleum Measurement reference tables.
User defined TEC(1)
(2)
Thermal expansion coefficient. Enter the value to be used in CTL calculation.
Temperature units
Read-only. Displays the unit used for reference temperature in the reference table.
Density units
Read-only. Displays the unit used for reference density in the reference table.
Reference
temperature
Read-only unless Table Type is set to 53x or 54x. If configurable:
• Specify the reference temperature to be used in CTL calculation.
• Enter reference temperature in °C.
(1) Configurable if Table Type is set to 6C, 24C, or 54C.
(2) In most cases, the temperature unit used by the PM reference table should also be the temperature unit configured for the transmitter
to use in general processing. To configure the temperature unit, see Section 4.4.
68
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Setting the table type
Before You Begin
You can set the PM table type with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Figure 4-13 Petroleum Measurement table type – Fieldbus host
Petroleum
Measurement
PM Table Type
PM Table Type – Set to the desired table type.
Startup
Figure 4-14 Petroleum Measurement table type – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
API Setup tab
Select table type from
the API Table Type
list
Calibration
Apply
Setting the reference temperature
For the temperature value to be used in CTL calculation, you can use the temperature data from the
sensor, or you can configure external temperature compensation to use either a static temperature
value or temperature data from an external temperature device.
•
To use temperature data from the sensor, no action is required.
•
To configure external temperature compensation, see Section 2.6.
You can set the reference temperature using a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
69
Configuration
Figure 4-15 Petroleum Measurement reference temperature – Fieldbus host
Petroleum
Measurem
PM Reference Temp
PM Reference Temp
– Set to the desired temperature (in the currently-configured temperature units).
Figure 4-16 Petroleum Measurement reference temperature – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
API Setup tab
Enter the reference
temperature in the User
defined reference
temperature list
Apply
Setting the thermal expansion coefficient
If the CTL derivation method for the API table type is method 2, you need to set the thermal
expansion coefficient (TEC). You can set a user-defined TEC with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Figure 4-17 TEC – Fieldbus host
Petroleum
Measurement
User Defined TEC
User Defined TEC
70
– Set to the desired thermal expansion coefficient.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-18 Petroleum Measurement – ProLink II
Before You Begin
ProLink >
Configuration
API Setup tab
Enter a coefficient in the
User defined TEC box
4.7
Startup
Apply
Configuring the concentration measurement application
Micro Motion sensors provide direct measurements of density, but not of concentration. The
concentration measurement application calculates concentration measurement process variables, such
as concentration or density at reference temperature, from density process data, appropriately
corrected for temperature.
Note: For a detailed description of the concentration measurement application, see the manual
entitled Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application: Theory, Configuration, and Use.
Note: The concentration measurement application requires liquid volume measurement units. If you
plan to use concentration measurement process variables, ensure that liquid volume flow
measurement is specified. See Section 4.3.
About the concentration measurement application
The concentration measurement calculation requires a concentration measurement curve, which
specifies the relationship between temperature, concentration, and density for the process fluid being
measured. Micro Motion supplies a set of six standard concentration measurement curves (see
Table 4-10). If none of these curves is appropriate for your process fluid, you can configure a custom
curve or purchase a custom curve from Micro Motion.
•
For all standard curves, the derived variable is Mass Conc (Dens).
•
For custom curves, the derived variable may be any of the variables listed in Table 4-11.
The transmitter can hold up to six curves at any given time, but only one curve can be active (used for
measurement) at a time. All curves that are in transmitter memory must use the same derived variable.
Configuration and Use Manual
71
Configuration
The derived variable, specified during configuration, controls the type of concentration measurement
that will be produced. Each derived variable allows the calculation of a subset of concentration
measurement process variables (see Table 4-11). The available concentration measurement process
variables can be used in process control, just as mass flow rate, volume flow rate, and other process
variables are used. For example, an event can be defined on a concentration measurement process
variable.
Calibration
4.7.1
Configuration
Table 4-10 Standard curves and associated measurement units
Name
Description
Density unit
Temperature unit
3
°F
Deg Balling
Curve represents percent extract, by mass, in
solution, based on °Balling. For example, if a wort
is 10 °Balling and the extract in solution is 100%
sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
g/cm
Deg Brix
Curve represents a hydrometer scale for sucrose
solutions that indicates the percent by mass of
sucrose in solution at a given temperature. For
example, 40 kg of sucrose mixed with 60 kg of
water results in a 40 °Brix solution.
g/cm3
°C
Deg Plato
Curve represents percent extract, by mass, in
solution, based on °Plato. For example, if a wort is
10 °Plato and the extract in solution is 100%
sucrose, the extract is 10% of the total mass.
g/cm3
°F
HFCS 42
Curve represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 42
(high fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates
the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm3
°C
HFCS 55
Curve represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 55
(high fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates
the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm3
°C
HFCS 90
Curve represents a hydrometer scale for HFCS 90
(high fructose corn syrup) solutions that indicates
the percent by mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm3
°C
Table 4-11 Derived variables and available process variables
Available process variables
Derived variable – ProLink II label
and definition
Density at
Standard
reference
volume
temperature flow rate
Density @ Ref
Density at reference temperature
Mass/unit volume, corrected to a given
reference temperature
x
x
SG
Specific gravity
The ratio of the density of a process fluid at
a given temperature to the density of water
at a given temperature. The two given
temperature conditions do not need to be
the same.
x
x
Mass Conc (Dens)
Mass concentration derived from reference
density
The percent mass of solute or of material
in suspension in the total solution, derived
from reference density
x
x
Mass Conc (SG)
Mass concentration derived from specific
gravity
The percent mass of solute or of material
in suspension in the total solution, derived
from specific gravity
x
x
72
Specific
gravity
Concentration
Net
mass
flow rate
x
x
x
x
Net
volume
flow rate
x
x
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Table 4-11 Derived variables and available process variables (continued)
Before You Begin
Available process variables
Derived variable – ProLink II label
and definition
Density at
Standard
reference
volume
temperature flow rate
x
x
Volume Conc (SG)
Volume concentration derived from specific
gravity
The percent volume of solute or of material
in suspension in the total solution, derived
from specific gravity
x
x
Conc (Dens)
Concentration derived from reference
density
The mass, volume, weight, or number of
moles of solute or of material in
suspension in proportion to the total
solution, derived from reference density
x
x
Conc (SG)
Concentration derived from specific gravity
The mass, volume, weight, or number of
moles of solute or of material in
suspension in proportion to the total
solution, derived from specific gravity
x
x
x
Concentration
Net
mass
flow rate
Net
volume
flow rate
x
x
x
x
x
Startup
Volume Conc (Dens)
Volume concentration derived from
reference density
The percent volume of solute or of material
in suspension in the total solution, derived
from reference density
Specific
gravity
x
x
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
73
Configuration
4.7.2
Configuration procedure
Complete configuration instructions for the concentration measurement application are provided in
the manual entitled Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application: Theory, Configuration, and Use.
Note: The concentration measurement manual uses ProLink II as the standard configuration tool for
the concentration measurement application. Because the fieldbus parameters are very similar to the
ProLink II labels, you can follow the instructions for ProLink II and adapt them to your host. All of
the parameters related to the concentration measurement application can be found in the
CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block (see Appendix B).
The typical configuration procedure simply sets up the concentration measurement application to use
a standard curve. The following steps are required:
1. Set the transmitter’s density measurement unit to match the unit used by the curve (as listed in
Table 4-10).
2. Set the transmitter’s temperature measurement unit to match the unit used by the curve (as
listed in Table 4-10).
3. Set the derived variable to Mass Conc (Dens).
4. Specify the active curve.
4.8
Changing the linearization
Linearization translates a process variable into different measurement units and onto a new scale.
Output scaling and linearization relate to each other in the following way:
•
When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Direct, the AI block reports process
variables directly from the MEASUREMENT transducer block. The transmitter is shipped
with all AI blocks set to Direct linearization by default.
•
When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Indirect, the value from the
MEASUREMENT transducer block is converted according to the Output Scale parameters
(see Section 4.9).
In addition, the AI block output is converted according to the Transducer Scale parameters, but
with a 1/x transformation, i.e., if the upper bound of the Transducer Scale is set to 50%, the
output will be doubled.
Indirect linearization can be used along with Output Scale and Transducer Scale to create
special measurement units. Refer Section 4.9 and to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks manual,
available from the Rosemount web site (www.rosemount.com), for information about creating
special units using this method.
•
When the linearization parameter of an AI block is set to Indirect square root, the AI block
reports the square root of the scaled output. In general, indirect square root linearization is not
useful for Coriolis meters.
You can change the linearization setting only with a fieldbus host.
74
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-19 Linearization – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
AI
Linearization Type
Linearization Type
4.9
– Set to the desired linearization value.
Changing the output scale
Note: Although it is possible to set the Output Scale: Units Index parameter to a value different from
the Transducer Scale: Units Index parameter, this has no effect on output. The Output Scale: Units
Index parameter is primarily useful as a label.
Startup
The AI function blocks can be configured to scale their output. The output scale is established by
defining a process variable value at 0% of scale and at 100% of scale. The output of the AI block will
be translated to a value between these two limits.
The output scale is a function of the AI blocks, and is only used when linearization is set to Indirect
(see Section 4.8). If you choose to use output scaling, note that it has no effect on the process values
found in the MEASUREMENT transducer block. This results in the following behaviors:
•
ProLink II and the display use the process values in the MEASUREMENT transducer block.
Therefore, the output of a scaled AI block may differ from the value reported by other
communication tools.
•
Slug flow and flow cutoffs are configured in the MEASUREMENT block. Therefore, output
scaling has no effect on the behavior of the transmitter with regard to slug flow or flow cutoffs.
Calibration
Example
To create a special unit for pints per second, the AI block assigned to channel 4 (volume) can be
configured as follows:
•
Transducer Scale: Units Index = gal/s
•
Transducer Scale: EU at 0% = 0
•
Transducer Scale: EU at 100% = 100
•
Output Scale: Units Index = pints
•
Output Scale: EU at 0% = 0
•
Output Scale: EU at 100% = 800
•
Linearization Type = Indirect
Volume Flow:Value
Display
16 pints/s
2 gal/s
2 gal/s
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
AI:Out
75
Configuration
You can change the output scale only with a fieldbus host (Figure 4-20).
Figure 4-20 Output scaling – Fieldbus host
AI
Output Scale: EU at 0%
Output Scale: EU at 100%
4.10
Output Scale: EU at 0%
– Set to process variable value at 0% of scale, in the configured units.
Output Scale: EU at 100%
– Set to process variable value at 100% of scale, in the configured units.
Changing process alarms
The transmitter sends process alarms to indicate that a process value has exceeded its user-defined
limits. The transmitter maintains four alarm values for each process variable. Each alarm value has a
priority associated with it. In addition, the transmitter has an alarm hysteresis function to prevent
erratic alarm reports.
Note: Process alarms are only posted through the AI function block and are NOT shown on
the display or in ProLink II.
4.10.1
Alarm values
The process alarm values are the limits for process variables. Whenever a process variable exceeds a
process alarm value, the transmitter broadcasts an alarm to the fieldbus network.
Each AI function block has four process alarm values: high alarm, high-high alarm, low alarm, and
low-low alarm.
Figure 4-21 Alarm values
Process variable
High-high alarm
High alarm
Normal process range
Low alarm
Low-low alarm
You can change the alarm values only with a fieldbus host.
76
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-22 Alarm values – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
High High Limit
High Limit
AI
Low Limit
Low Low Limit
High High Limit
– Set to the value for the high-high alarm.
High Limit
– Set to the value for the high alarm.
Low Limit
– Set to the value for the low alarm.
Low Low Limit
– Set to the value for the low-low alarm.
Alarm priorities
Each process alarm is assigned an alarm priority. A process alarm priority is a number from 0 to 15.
Higher numbers indicate higher alarm priorities. These values are for fieldbus network management
and do not affect transmitter operation.
Startup
4.10.2
You can change the process alarm priority values only with a fieldbus host.
Figure 4-23 Alarm priorities – Fieldbus host
High High Priority
High Priority
AI
Low Priority
Calibration
Low Low Priority
High High Priority
– Set to the priority for the high-high alarm.
High Priority
– Set to the priority for the high alarm.
Low Priority
– Set to the priority for the low alarm.
Low Low Priority
– Set to the priority for the low-low alarm.
4.10.3
Alarm hysteresis
Configuration and Use Manual
77
Configuration
The alarm hysteresis value is a percentage of the output scale. After a process alarm is created, the
transmitter will not create new alarms unless the process first returns to a value within the range of the
alarm hysteresis percentage. Figure 4-24 shows the transmitter’s alarm behavior with an alarm
hysteresis value of 50%.
Configuration
Note the following about hysteresis:
•
A low hysteresis value allows the transmitter to broadcast a new alarm every time or nearly
every time the process variable crosses over the alarm limit.
•
A high hysteresis value prevents the transmitter from broadcasting new alarms unless the
process variable first returns to a value sufficiently below the high alarm limit or above the low
alarm limit.
Figure 4-24 High versus low alarm hysteresis values
New alarms
not created
New alarm
created here
Process variable
HIGH ALARM
Alarm created
Hysteresis value
LOW ALARM
You can change the alarm hysteresis value only with a fieldbus host.
Figure 4-25 Alarm hysteresis – Fieldbus host
AI
Alarm Hysteresis
Alarm Hysteresis
78
– Set to the desired percentage of output scale, where scale is defined by either the
Transducer Scale or Output Scale values.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
4.11
Configuring status alarm severity
The severity level of some alarms can be reclassified. For example:
•
The default severity level for Alarm A020 (calibration factors unentered) is Fault, but you can
reconfigure it to either Informational or Ignore.
•
The default severity level for Alarm A102 (drive over-range) is Informational, but you can
reconfigure it to either Ignore or Fault.
Before You Begin
Status alarm severity does not affect the fieldbus alarm system (see Figure 4.10). The main function of
status alarm severity in the Model 2700 with FOUNDATION fieldbus transmitter is to control the
behavior of the display. See Section 5.4 for information about how the display indicates the severity of
alarms.
A list of all status alarms and default severity levels is shown in the following table. (For more
information on status alarms, including possible causes and troubleshooting suggestions, see
Section 6.9.)
Table 4-12 Status alarms and severity levels
Description
Default
severity
Configurable
A001
(E)EPROM Checksum Error (CP)
Fault
No
A002
RAM Error (CP)
Fault
No
A003
Sensor Failure
Fault
Yes
A004
Temperature Sensor Failure
Fault
No
A005
Input Overrange
Fault
Yes
Fault
Yes
Density Overrange
Fault
Yes
A009
Transmitter Initializing/warming Up
Ignore
Yes
A010
Calibration Failure
Fault
No
A011
Cal Fail - Too Low
Fault
Yes
A012
Cal Fail - Too High
Fault
Yes
A013
Cal Fail - Too Noisy
Fault
Yes
A014
Transmitter Failed
Fault
No
A016
Line RTD Temperature Out-of-Range
Fault
Yes
A017
Meter RTD Temperature Out-of-Range
Fault
Yes
A018
(E)EPROM Checksum Error
Fault
No
A019
RAM or ROM Test Error
Fault
No
A020
Calibration Factors Unentered
Fault
Yes
A021
Incorrect Sensor Type (K1)
Fault
No
A025
Protected Boot Sector Fault (CP)
Fault
No
A026
Sensor/Transmitter Communication Error
Fault
No
A028
Core Processor Write Failure
Fault
No
A031
Low Power
Fault
No
(1)
No
A032
Smart Meter Verification In Progress and Outputs Fixed
Fault
A033
Sensor OK/Tubes Stopped by Process
Fault
Yes
A034
Smart Meter Verification Failed
Informational
Yes
A102
Drive Overrange/Partially Full Tube
Informational
Yes
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
Not Configured
A008
Calibration
A006
Startup
Alarm code
79
Configuration
Table 4-12 Status alarms and severity levels (continued)
Alarm code
Description
Default
severity
A103
Data Loss Possible (Tot and Inv)
Informational
Configurable
Yes
(2)
Yes
A104
Calibration-in-Progress
Informational
A105
Slug Flow
Informational
Yes
A106
AI/AO Simulation Active
Informational
No
A107
Power Reset Occurred
Informational
Yes
A116
API: Temperature Outside Standard Range
Informational
Yes
A117
API: Density Outside Standard Range
Informational
Yes
A120
CM: Unable to Fit Curve Data
Informational
No
A121
CM: Extrapolation Alarm
Informational
Yes
A128
Factory configuration data invalid
Informational
Yes
A129
Factory configuration data checksum invalid
Fault
No
A131
Smart Meter Verification In Progress
Informational
Yes
A132
Simulation Mode Active
Informational
Yes
(1) The severity changes automatically based on the configured output state of a Smart Meter Verification test. If the output state is set
to Last Measured Value (LMV), the alarm severity will be Informational. If the output state is set to Fault, the alarm severity will be
Fault.
(2) Can be set to either Informational or Ignore, but cannot be set to Fault.
Alarm severity can be configured with a fieldbus host or ProLink II. Some configurable alarms can be
set to either Informational or Ignore, but not to Fault.
Figure 4-26 Alarm severity – Fieldbus host
DIAGNOSTICS
Alarm Index
Alarm Severity
Alarm Index
– Select an alarm for which you want to modify the severity. (You must write to the
transmitter before the Alarm Severity parameter becomes available.)
Alarm Severity – Select a severity for the alarm indicated by the Alarm Index parameter.
80
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-27 Alarm severity – ProLink II
Before You Begin
ProLink >
Configuration
Select an alarm from
the Alarm list
Alarm tab
Select a severity from
the Severity list
Apply
Startup
4.12
Changing the damping values
A damping value is a period of time, in seconds, over which the process variable value will change to
reflect 63% of the change in the actual process. Damping helps the transmitter smooth out small,
rapid measurement fluctuations.
•
A high damping value makes the output appear to be smoother because the output must change
slowly.
•
A low damping value makes the output appear to be more erratic because the output changes
more quickly.
Damping can be configured for flow, density, and temperature using a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
When you specify a new damping value, it is automatically rounded down to the nearest valid
damping value. Valid damping values are listed in Table 4-13.
Calibration
Note: There is also a damping parameter in each AI block called Process Value Filter Time. In order
to avoid having two (potentially conflicting) damping values, you should set damping values only in
the MEASUREMENT transducer block. The Process Value Filter Time parameter for each AI block
should be set to 0.
Note: For gas applications, Micro Motion recommends a minimum flow damping value of 2.56.
Before setting the damping values, review Section 4.12.1 for information on how the damping values
affect other transmitter measurements.
Table 4-13 Valid damping values
Valid damping values
Flow (mass and volume)
0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, ... 40.96
Density
0, 0.04, 0.08, 0.16, ... 40.96
Temperature
0, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, ... 76.8
Configuration and Use Manual
Configuration
Process variable
81
Configuration
Figure 4-28 Damping – Fieldbus host
Flow Damping
MEASUREMENT
Density Damping
Temperature Damping
Flow Damping
– Set to the desired damping value for mass flow and volume flow measurement.
Density Damping
– Set to the desired damping value for density measurement.
Temperature Damping
– Set to the desired damping value for temperature measurement.
Figure 4-29 Damping – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
4.12.1
Flow tab
Density tab
Temperature tab
Enter a damping value in
the Flow Damp box
Enter a damping value in
the Dens Damping box
Enter a damping value in
the Temp Damping box
Apply
Apply
Apply
Damping and volume measurement
When configuring damping values, note the following:
•
Liquid volume flow is derived from mass and density measurements; therefore, any damping
applied to mass flow and density will affect liquid volume measurement.
•
Gas standard volume flow is derived from mass flow measurement, but not from density
measurement. Therefore, only damping applied to mass flow will affect gas standard volume
measurement.
Be sure to set damping values accordingly.
82
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
4.13
Changing slug flow limits and duration
Slug flow parameters are as follows:
Low slug flow limit — the point below which a condition of slug flow will exist. Typically, this
is the lowest density you expect to observe for your process. The default value is 0.0 g/cm3.
The valid range is 0.0–10.0 g/cm3.
•
High slug flow limit — the point above which a condition of slug flow will exist. Typically,
this is the highest density you expect to observe for your process. The default value is
5.0 g/cm3. The valid range is 0.0–10.0 g/cm3.
•
Slug flow duration — the number of seconds the transmitter waits for a slug flow condition to
clear. If the transmitter detects slug flow, it will post a slug flow alarm and hold its last
“pre-slug” flow rate until the end of the slug flow duration. If slugs are still present after the
slug flow duration has expired, the transmitter will report a flow rate of zero. The default value
for slug flow duration is 0.0 seconds. The valid range is 0.0–60.0 seconds.
Note: Raising the low slug flow limit or lowering the high slug flow limit will increase the possibility
that slug flow conditions will be detected by the transmitter.
Startup
•
Before You Begin
Slugs—gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process—occasionally appear in some applications.
The presence of slugs can significantly affect the process density reading. The slug flow parameters
can help the transmitter suppress extreme changes in process variables, and can also be used to
identify process conditions that require correction.
Note: The slug flow limits must be entered in g/cm3, even if another unit has been configured for
density. Slug flow duration must be entered in seconds.
Slug flow can be configured using a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Figure 4-30 Slug flow settings – Fieldbus host
Calibration
Slug Low Limit
DIAGNOSTICS
Slug High Limit
Slug Duration
Slug Low Limit
– Set to the density below which a condition of slug flow will exist.
Slug High Limit – Set to the density above which a condition of slug flow will exist.
Slug Duration
– Set to the number of seconds to wait for a slug flow condition to clear before a slug flow
alarm is posted.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
83
Configuration
Figure 4-31 Slug flow settings – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Density tab
Set the density limits:
• Slug Low Limit
• Slug High Limit
Set the slug flow
duration in the Slug
Duration box
Apply
4.14
Configuring cutoffs
Cutoffs are user-defined values below which the transmitter reports a value of zero for the specified
process variable. Cutoffs can be set for mass flow, volume flow, gas standard volume flow, and
density.
The following table lists the default values and relevant comments for each cutoff. See Section 4.14.1
for information on how the cutoffs interact with other transmitter measurements.
Table 4-14 Cutoff default values and comments
Cutoff
Default value
Comments
Mass
0.0 g/s
Micro Motion recommends a mass flow cutoff value of 0.2% of the
sensor’s maximum flow rate for standard operation, and 2.5% of the
sensor’s maximum flow rate for empty-full-empty batching.
Liquid volume
0.0 L/s
The lower limit for volume flow cutoff is 0. The upper limit for volume flow
cutoff is the sensor’s flow calibration factor, in L/s, multiplied by 0.2.
Gas standard
volume flow
0.0 SCFM
No limit
Density
0.2 g/cm3
The range for density cutoff is 0.0–0.5 g/cm3
Cutoffs can be configured with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
84
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-32 Cutoffs – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
Mass Flow Cutoff
Vol Flow Cutoff
MEASUREMENT
Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff
Density Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff
– Set to the desired mass flow cutoff value.
Vol Flow Cutoff
– Set to the desired (liquid) volume flow cutoff value.
Std Gas Vol Flow Cutoff – Set to the desired (gas) volume flow cutoff value.
Density Cutoff
– Set to the desired density cutoff value.
Startup
Figure 4-33 Cutoffs – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Density tab
Enter values in the Mass
Flow Cutoff or Volume
Flow Cutoff(1) boxes
Enter a value in the
Density Cutoff box
Apply
Apply
Calibration
Flow tab
(1) When volume flow is configured for gas standard volume, this box is labeled
Std gas vol flow cutoff.
4.14.1
Cutoffs and volume flow
If liquid volume flow is enabled:
The density cutoff is applied to the volume flow calculation. Accordingly, if the density drops
below its configured cutoff value, the volume flow rate will go to zero.
•
The mass flow cutoff is not applied to the volume flow calculation. Even if the mass flow
drops below the cutoff, and therefore the mass flow indicators go to zero, the volume flow rate
will be calculated from the actual mass flow process variable.
If gas standard volume flow is enabled, neither the mass flow cutoff nor the density cutoff is applied
to the volume flow calculation.
Configuration and Use Manual
85
Configuration
•
Configuration
4.15
Changing the flow direction parameter
The flow direction parameter controls how the transmitter reports flow rate and how flow is added to
or subtracted from the totalizers.
•
Forward (positive) flow moves in the direction of the arrow on the sensor.
•
Reverse (negative) flow moves in the direction opposite of the arrow on the sensor.
Options for flow direction include:
•
Forward Flow
•
Reverse Flow
•
Bi-directional
•
Absolute Value
•
Negate/Forward Only
•
Negate/Bi-directional
The effect of each of these options is shown in the following table.
Table 4-15 Transmitter behavior for each flow direction value
Forward flow
Reverse flow
Flow direction
value
Flow totals
Flow values on display
or via digital comm.
Flow totals
Flow values on display
or via digital comm.
Forward only
Increase
Read positive
No change
Read negative
Reverse only
No change
Read positive
Increase
Read negative
Bi-directional
Increase
Read positive
Decrease
Read negative
Read positive
Increase
Read positive(1)
(1)
Absolute value
Increase
Negate/forward only
No change
Read negative
Increase
Read positive
Negate/bi-directional
Decrease
Read negative
Increase
Read positive
(1) Refer to the digital communications status bits for an indication of whether flow is positive or negative.
You can change the flow direction parameter with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Figure 4-34 Flow direction parameter – Fieldbus host
MEASUREMENT
Flow Direction
Flow Direction
86
– Set to the desired value (refer to Flow direction value in Table 4-15).
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-35 Flow direction parameter – ProLink II
Before You Begin
ProLink >
Configuration
Flow tab
Select a value from
the Flow Direction
list
See Table 4-15 for flow
direction values.
Apply
Startup
4.16
Changing device settings
The device settings are used to describe the flowmeter components. The following information can be
entered:
•
Tag
•
Message
•
Date
These parameters are for user convenience and network management. They are not used in transmitter
processing, and are not required.
You can set the tag with a fieldbus host by using the host’s tagging features. You can set the tag,
message, and date with ProLink II (Figure 4-36).
Calibration
CAUTION
Setting the software tag via ProLink II will cause the transmitter to restart.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
87
Configuration
Figure 4-36 Device settings – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Device (Fieldbus) tab
Enter information in
the boxes provided
Apply
If you are entering a date, use the left and right arrows at the top of the calendar shown in ProLink II
to select the year and month, then click on a date.
4.17
Configuring sensor parameters
The sensor parameters are used to describe the sensor component of your flowmeter. These sensor
parameters are not used in transmitter processing, and are not required:
•
Serial number
•
Sensor material
•
Liner material
•
Flange
You can configure the sensor parameters with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Figure 4-37 Sensor parameters – Fieldbus host
Sensor Serial Number
DEVICE
INFORMATION
Sensor Material
Liner Material
Flange
Sensor Serial Number
88
– Enter the sensor serial number.
Sensor Material
Select the sensor material.
Liner Material
Select the liner material.
Flange
Select the flange.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-38 Sensor parameters – ProLink II
Before You Begin
ProLink >
Configuration
Select the liner
material from the
Liner Matl list
Sensor tab
Select the flange from
the Flange list
Enter the sensor
serial number in the
Sensor s/n box
Apply
4.18
Startup
Select the sensor
serial material from
the Sensor Matl list
Changing the display functionality
You can restrict the display functionality or change the variables that are shown on the display.
4.18.1
Enabling and disabling display functions
Table 4-16 Display functions and parameters
Fieldbus
parameter
Display code
Enabled
Disabled
Totalizer reset
Totalizer reset
TOTAL RESET
Resetting mass and volume
totalizers is permitted.
Resetting mass and
volume totalizers is not
possible.
Totalizer start/stop
Totalizer start/stop
TOTAL STOP
Operator can start and stop
totalizers from the display.
Operator cannot start or
stop totalizers.
Auto scroll(2)
Auto scroll
AUTO SCRLL
Display automatically
scrolls through each
process variable.
Operator must Scroll to
view process variables.
Offline menu
Offline menu
DISPLAY OFFLN
Operator has access to the
offline menu.
No access to the offline
menu.
Alarm menu
Alarm menu
DISPLAY ALARM
Operator has access to
alarm menu.
No access to the alarm
menu.
ACK all alarms
ACK all alarms
DISPLAY ACK
Operator can acknowledge
all current alarms at once.
Alarms must be
acknowledged individually.
Offline password(3)
Offline password
CODE OFFLN
Password required for
offline menu. See
Section 4.18.4
Offline menu accessible
without a password.
(1)
89
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
Calibration
Display
function
Configuration
Table 4-16 Display functions and parameters (continued)
Display
function
Fieldbus
parameter
Display code
Enabled
Disabled
Display backlight
Display backlight
DISPLAY BKLT
Display backlight is ON.
Display backlight is OFF.
Status LED
blinking
Status LED
blinking
Not accessible via
the display
Status LED will blink when
there are unacknowledged
alarms active.
Status LED will not blink.
Alarm password(3)
Alarm password
CODE ALARM
Password required for
alarms menu.
Alarm menu accessible
without a password.
(1) If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password is always required to start, stop, or
reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password
is never required for these functions, even if one of the display passwords is enabled.
(2) If enabled, you may want to configure Scroll Rate. See Section 4.18.2.
(3) If enabled, the display password must also be configured. See Section 4.18.4.
Note the following:
•
If you use the display to disable access to the off-line menu, the off-line menu will disappear
as soon as you exit the menu system. If you want to re-enable access, you must use a different
method (e.g., ProLink II).
•
If you are using the display to configure the display:
-
You must enable Auto Scroll before you can configure Scroll Rate.
-
You must enable the off-line password before you can configure the password.
You can enable and disable the display parameters with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.
Figure 4-39 Display functions – Fieldbus host
LOCAL DISPLAY
*
*
90
– Refer to the fieldbus parameters in Table 4-16. Each parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-40 Display functions – ProLink II
Before You Begin
ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Enable or disable
functions using the
checkboxes
Apply
Startup
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
91
Configuration
Figure 4-41 Display functions – Display
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
TOTALS RESET
CODE OFFLN(3)
Scroll
Scroll
TOTALS STOP
CODE ALARM(3)
Scroll
Scroll
DISPLAY OFFLN(1)
DISPLAY BKLT
Scroll
Scroll
DISPLAY ALARM
EXIT
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
CONFG
Select
UNITS
Scroll
Select
Scroll
DISPLAY
DISPLAY ACK
Scroll
Scroll
AUTO SCRLL(2)
(1) If you disable access to the offline menu, the offline menu will disappear as soon as you exit. To re-enable access, you must
use a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
(2) If Auto Scroll is enabled, a Scroll Rate screen is displayed immediately after the Auto Scroll screen.
(3) If either password is enabled, a Change Code screen will be displayed so that the password can be configured.
4.18.2
Changing the scroll rate
The scroll rate is used to control the speed of scrolling when auto scroll is enabled. Scroll rate defines
how long each display variable will be shown on the display. The time period is defined in seconds
(e.g., if scroll rate is set to 10, each display variable will be shown on the display for 10 seconds). The
valid range is from 0 to 10 seconds.
You can change the scroll rate with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
92
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-42 Scroll rate – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
LOCAL DISPLAY
Display Scroll Rate
Display Scroll Rate – Set to the number of seconds each variable should be displayed.
Figure 4-43 Scroll rate – ProLink II
Startup
ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Enter number of
seconds in Auto
Scroll Rate box
Apply
Changing the update period
The update period (or display rate) parameter controls how often the display is refreshed with current
data. The default is 200 milliseconds. The range is 100 to 10000 milliseconds. The update period
value applies to all displayed process variables.
Calibration
4.18.3
You can change the update period with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.
Figure 4-44 Update period – Fieldbus host
Configuration
LOCAL DISPLAY
Update rate
Update Rate – Set to the number of milliseconds between updates to the display (100 to 10000,
default is 200).
Configuration and Use Manual
93
Configuration
Figure 4-45 Update period – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Enter a value
between 100 and
10000 milliseconds in
the Update Period
box
Apply
Figure 4-46 Update period – Display
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
TOTALS RESET
CONFG
Scroll
Select
DISPLAY RATE
UNITS
Scroll
DISPLAY
4.18.4
Select
Select
Enter a value between
100 and 10000
milliseconds
Changing the display password
The display password is a numeric code that can contain up to four digits. It is used for both the
off-line menu password and the alarm menu password. See Section 4.4.4 for information on how the
two passwords are implemented.
94
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Note: If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password
is always required to start, stop, or reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the
petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password is never required for these
functions, even if one of the passwords is enabled.
You can change the password with a fieldbus host, Prolink II, or the display.
Before You Begin
If you are using the display, you must enable either the off-line password or the alarm screen
password before you can configure the password (see Section 4.18.1).
Figure 4-47 Display password – Fieldbus host
LOCAL DISPLAY
Display Offline Password
Startup
Display Offline Password
– Enter a 4-digit password between 0000 and 9999.
Figure 4-48 Display password – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Calibration
Display tab
Enter a 4-digit
password in the
Offline Password
box
Apply
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
95
Configuration
Figure 4-49 Display password – Display
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
Select
Scroll
CODE OFFLN(1)
CONFG
Scroll
Select
UNITS
CHANGE CODE
(1) Select CODE OFFLN to
enable the display
password. This will
enable the CHANGE
CODE option, which is
used to set the display
password.
Select
Scroll
Enter a new password.
DISPLAY
96
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
4.18.5
Changing the display variables and precision
Before You Begin
The display can scroll through up to 15 process variables in any order. You can select the process
variables you wish to see and the order in which they should appear.
Additionally, you can configure display precision for each display variable. Display precision
controls the number of digits to the right of the decimal place. The range of the display precision
is 0 to 5.
Note: If you change the volume flow type from Liquid Volume to Gas Standard Volume (see
Section 4.3), any display variables configured for volume flow will change automatically to GSV flow.
Likewise, if you change the volume flow type from Gas Standard Volume to Liquid Volume, any
display variables configured for GSV flow will change automatically to volume flow.
Table 4-17 shows an example of a display variable configuration. Notice that you can repeat variables,
and you can choose a value of “None.” The actual appearance of each process variable on the display
is described in Appendix 4.
Table 4-17 Example of a display variable configuration
Process variable
Display variable 1
Mass flow
Display variable 2
Volume flow
Display variable 3
Density
Display variable 4
Mass flow
Display variable 5
Volume flow
Display variable 6
Mass totalizer
Display variable 7
Mass flow
Temperature
Display variable 9
Volume flow
Display variable 10
Volume totalizer
Display variable 11
Density
Display variable 12
Temperature
Display variable 13
None
Display variable 14
None
Display variable 15
None
Calibration
Display variable 8
Startup
Display variable
You can change the display variables and precision with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
97
Configuration
Figure 4-50 Display variables – Fieldbus host
LOCAL DISPLAY
Display Variable 1 through Display Variable 15
Number of Decimals
Display Variable 1...15
– Set each parameter to an available process variable.
Number of Decimals
– Set to the number of decimal places to be shown on the display.
Figure 4-51 Display variables – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Display tab
Select a process
variable from each
drop-down list
Enter a value in the
Number of Decimals
box
Apply
4.18.6
Changing the display language
The display can be configured to use any of the following languages for data and menus:
•
English
•
French
•
German
•
Spanish
The display language can be configured using a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.
98
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-52 Display language – Fieldbus host
Before You Begin
LOCAL DISPLAY
Language
Language – Set to the desired display language.
Figure 4-53 Display language – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Startup
Display tab
Select a language
from the Display
Language list
Apply
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
99
Configuration
Figure 4-54 Display language – Display
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
TOTALS RESET
OFF-LINE MAINT
Scroll
Select
DISPLAY LANG
Scroll
Select
CONFG
ENG
Select
Scroll
UNITS
Scroll
Select
DISPLAY
FREN
Scroll
GER
Scroll
SPAN
4.19
Configuring write-protect mode
When the transmitter is in write-protect mode, the configuration data stored in the transmitter and
core processor cannot be changed until write-protect mode is disabled.
You can configure write-protect mode with a fieldbus host, ProLink II, or the display.
Figure 4-55 Write-protect mode – Fieldbus host
100
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-56 Write-protect mode – ProLink II
Before You Begin
ProLink >
Configuration
Device (Fieldbus) tab
Select the Enable
Write Protection
checkbox
Apply
Startup
Figure 4-57 Write-protect mode – Display
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Calibration
Scroll
CONFIG LOCK
Select
ENABL/DISABL
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
101
Configuration
4.20
Enabling LD Optimization
LD Optimization is a special compensation is that is specifically for hydrocarbon liquids. LD
Optimization should not be used with any other process fluids. LD Optimization is available only with
certain large sensor sizes. If your sensor can benefit from LD Optimization, the enable/disable option
will appear in ProLink II or on the display.
CAUTION
If you send the transmitter to a calibration facility to perform a water
calibration, either during startup or any time thereafter, LD Optimization
must be disabled. When you have completed the calibration, re-enable LD
Optimization.
To enable LD Optimization, see Figures 4-58 and 4-59.
Figure 4-58 LD Optimization – ProLink II
102
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Configuration
Figure 4-59 LD Optimization – Display
Before You Begin
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
Scroll
OFF-LINE MAINT
Select
Scroll
CONFG
FACTOR LD
Scroll
Scroll
MTR F
Startup
Select
Select
Select
LD OPT
Calibration
Configuration
Configuration and Use Manual
103
Configuration
104
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
5.1
Operation
Chapter 5
Operation
Overview
This section describes how to use the transmitter in everyday operation. The procedures in this section
will enable you to use a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II to:
View process variables (Section 5.2)
•
Use simulation mode (Section 5.3)
•
Respond to alarms (Section 5.4)
•
Use the totalizers and inventories (Section 5.5)
Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with
the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2
and 3.
5.2
Troubleshooting
•
Viewing process variables
Process variables include measurements such as mass flow rate, volume flow rate, mass total, volume
total, temperature, density, and drive gain.
You can view process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II.
The transmitter has four fieldbus AI function blocks. Each AI function block reports the value of one
process variable, the associated units of measure, and a status value that indicates measurement
quality. For more information on the function blocks, refer to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Blocks
manual, available at the Rosemount web site (www.rosemount.com).
To view a process variable, select the AI function block that measures that variable, and read the Out
parameter. The output of AI blocks may be influenced by output scaling (see Section 4.9).
PlantWeb Alerts
With a fieldbus host
You can also view each process variable by reading the MEASUREMENT transducer block
parameter for each process variable. The following table lists the process variables that correspond to
each MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter.
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
105
Operation
Table 5-1
Process variable parameters in the MEASUREMENT transducer block
Process variable
Transducer block parameter
Mass-flow rate
Mass Flow: Value
Volume-flow rate
Volume Flow: Value
Temperature
Temperature: Value
Density
Density: Value
(1)
Gas standard volume
Gas Volume Flow Rate: Value
(1) Gas standard volume is not available if either the petroleum measurement application or the concentration measurement
application is enabled.
With the display
Refer to Appendix 4 for a detailed explanation of how to use the display to view process variables.
The process variables shown by the display may need to be configured. Refer to Section 4.18.5.
With ProLink II software
To view process variables with ProLink II, choose ProLink > Process Variables.
5.2.1
Viewing API process variables
You can view petroleum measurement (API) process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or
ProLink II.
With a fieldbus host
If an AI function block has been configured to use one of the petroleum measurement (API) variable
channels (see Section 2.3), you can select that AI block and read its Out parameter.
You can also view all of the petroleum measurement (API) variables by examining their parameters in
the petroleum measurement (API) transducer block.
Table 5-2
106
Petroleum Measurement process variables by API transducer block parameter
API process variable
API transducer block parameter
Temperature corrected density
API Corr Density: Value
Temperature corrected (standard) volume flow
API Corr Volume Flow: Value
Batch weighted average density
API Ave Density: Value
Batch weighted average temperature
API Ave Temperature: Value
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Operation
With the display
With ProLink II software
To view API process variables with ProLink II software, choose ProLink > API Process Variables.
5.2.2
Operation
Refer to Appendix 4 for a detailed explanation of how to use the display to view process variables.
The process variables shown by the display may need to be configured. Refer to Section 4.18.5.
Viewing concentration measurement process variables
You can view concentration measurement (CM) process variables with a fieldbus host, the display, or
ProLink II.
With a fieldbus host
You can also view all of the CM variables by examining their parameters in the CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT transducer block.
Table 5-3
CM process variables by CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameter
CM process variable
CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT
transducer block parameter
Density at reference
CM Density At Ref: Value
Density (fixed specific gravity units)
CM Density SG: Value
Standard volume flow rate
CM Std Volume Flow: Value
Net mass flow rate
CM Net Mass Flow: Value
Concentration
CM Concentration: Value
Troubleshooting
If an AI function block has been configured to use one of the CM variable channels (see Section 2.3),
you can select that AI block and read its Out parameter.
PlantWeb Alerts
With the display
Refer to Appendix 4 for a detailed explanation of how to use the display to view process variables.
The process variables shown by the display may need to be configured. Refer to Section 4.18.5.
With ProLink II software
To view CM process variables with ProLink II, choose ProLink > CM Process Variables.
5.3
Simulation mode
The transmitter has two simulation modes:
•
Fieldbus simulation mode
•
Sensor simulation mode
TB Reference
5.3.1
Fieldbus simulation mode
The transmitter has a “simulate enable” switch that causes the transmitter to function in simulation
mode as defined in the FOUNDATION fieldbus function block specification. This switch is
software-selectable via a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Configuration and Use Manual
107
Operation
Figure 5-1
Fieldbus simulation mode – Fieldbus host
DEVICE
INFORMATION
Simulate Mode
Simulate Mode – Set to Enabled to activate simulation mode.
Figure 5-2
Fieldbus simulation mode – ProLink II
ProLink >
Configuration
Device (Fieldbus) tab
Select Simulate
Mode
Apply
5.3.2
Sensor simulation mode
Sensor simulation mode causes simulated values to be substituted for actual process data from the
sensor. Sensor simulation mode can be enabled only with ProLink II.
108
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Operation
Figure 5-3
Sensor simulation mode – ProLink II
Sensor Simulation tab
Select Enable
Simulation Mode
Operation
ProLink >
Configuration
Select a wave form
for mass flow,
density, and
temperature from the
Wave Form lists
Triangular or
sine wave
Enter a value in the
Fixed Value box
Enter period in the
Period box
Troubleshooting
Fixed wave
Enter minimum and
maximum amplitude
in the Minimum and
Maximum boxes
Apply
Responding to alarms
The transmitter broadcasts alarms when a process variable exceeds its defined limits or the transmitter
detects a fault condition. For instructions regarding all the possible alarms, see Section 6.9.
5.4.1
Viewing alarms
PlantWeb Alerts
5.4
You can view alarms with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II software.
With a fieldbus host
The transmitter sets its fieldbus output status to bad or uncertain whenever an alarm condition occurs.
A PlantWeb Alert may also be posted. (See Appendix A for information about PlantWeb Alerts.)
When the output status is bad or uncertain, you can view an alarm by reading the following alarm
parameters:
Each AI function block contains a parameter called Block Error that contains the alarm bits for
that AI block.
•
The DIAGNOSTICS transducer block contains four parameters named Alarm Status 1
through Alarm Status 4. Each of these parameters has a short list of alarm bits (see
Appendix B).
Configuration and Use Manual
109
TB Reference
•
Operation
With the display
The display reports alarms in two ways:
•
With a status LED, which reports only that one or more alarms has occurred
•
Through the alarm queue, which reports each specific alarm
Note: If access to the alarm menu from the display has been disabled (see Section 4.18), then the
display will not list alarm codes in an alarm queue and the status LED will not flash. The status LED
will indicate status using solid green, yellow, or red.
Figure 5-4
Display alarm menu
Status LED
Table 5-4
Priorities reported by the status LED
Status LED state
Alarm priority
Green
No alarm—normal operating mode
Flashing green
(1)
Yellow
Unacknowledged corrected condition
Acknowledged low severity alarm
(1)
Flashing yellow
Unacknowledged low severity alarm
Red
Acknowledged high severity alarm
Flashing red(1)
Unacknowledged high severity alarm
(1) If the LED blinking option is turned off (see Section 4.18.1), the status LED will flash only during calibration. It will not
flash to indicate an unacknowledged alarm.
Alarms in the alarm queue are arranged according to priority.
110
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Operation
Figure 5-5
Viewing and acknowledging alarms – Display
Operation
Scroll and Select simultaneously
for 4 seconds
SEE ALARM
Select
(1) ACK ALL will appear only if
it has been enabled.
See Section 5.4.
ACK ALL(1)
Yes
No
Select
Scroll
Troubleshooting
EXIT
Select
Scroll
Active/
unacknowledged
alarms?
Yes
No
Alarm code
Select
Scroll
ACK
EXIT
Yes
Select
PlantWeb Alerts
Scroll
NO ALARM
No
Scroll
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
111
Operation
With ProLink II
ProLink II provides two ways to view alarm information:
•
Choose ProLink > Status. This window shows the current status of all possible alarms,
independent of configured alarm severity. The alarms are divided into three categories:
Critical, Informational, and Operational. To view the indicators in a category, click on the
associated tab. A tab is red if one or more status indicators in that category is active. On each
tab, currently active alarms are shown by red indicators.
•
Choose ProLink > Alarm Log. This window lists all active alarms, and all inactive but
unacknowledged Fault and Informational alarms. (The transmitter automatically filters out
Ignore alarms.) A green indicator means “inactive but unacknowledged” and a red indicator
means “active.” Alarms are organized into two categories: High Priority and Low Priority.
Note: The location of alarms in the Status and Alarm Log windows are not affected by the configured
alarm severity (see Section 4.11). Alarms in the Status window are predefined as Critical,
Informational, or Operational. Alarms in the Alarm Log window are predefined as High Priority or
Low Priority.
5.4.2
Acknowledging alarms
You can acknowledge alarms using ProLink II or the display. For transmitters with a display, access to
the alarm menu can be enabled or disabled, and a password may be required. If access to the alarm
menu is enabled, the operator may be disallowed from acknowledging all alarms simultaneously (the
Ack All? function). See Section 4.18.1 for information on controlling these functions.
If the LED blinking option has been turned off, the status LED will not flash to indicate
unacknowledged alarms. Alarms can still be acknowledged.
To acknowledge alarms using the display:
1. Activate and hold Scroll and Select simultaneously until the words SEE ALARM appear on
the screen. See Figure 5-4.
2. Select.
3. If the words NO ALARM appear, go to Step 8.
4. If you want to acknowledge all alarms:
a. Scroll until the word ACK appears by itself. The word ACK begins to alternate with the
word ALL?.
b. Select.
Note: If the “acknowledge all alarms” feature has been disabled (see Section 4.18.1, then you must
acknowledge each alarm individually. See Step 5.
5. If you want to acknowledge a single alarm:
a. Scroll until the alarm you want to acknowledge appears.
b. Select. The word ALARM begins to alternate with the word ACK.
c. Select to acknowledge the alarm.
6. If you want to acknowledge another alarm, go to Step 3.
7. If you do NOT want to acknowledge any more alarms, go to Step 8.
8. Scroll until the word EXIT appears.
9. Select.
112
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Operation
To acknowledge alarms using ProLink II:
•
All active alarms are listed with a red status indicator.
•
All alarms that are “cleared but unacknowledged” are listed with a green status indicator.
Operation
1. Click ProLink > Alarm Log. Entries in the alarm log are divided into two categories: High
Priority and Low Priority, corresponding to the default Fault and Information alarm severity
levels. Within each category:
2. For each alarm that you want to acknowledge, select the ACK checkbox.
5.5
Using the totalizers and inventories
The totalizers keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter over a
period of time. The totalizers can be viewed, started, stopped, and reset.
5.5.1
Viewing the totalizers and inventories
You can view the current value of the mass totalizer, volume totalizer, mass inventory, and volume
inventory with a fieldbus host, the display, or ProLink II.
Troubleshooting
The inventories track the same values as the totalizers but can be reset separately. Because the
inventories and totals are reset separately, you can use the inventories to keep a running total of mass
or volume across multiple totalizer resets.
With a fieldbus host
If you have set up the INT function block to report the status of one of the internal totalizers or
inventories (see Section 2.4), you can simply read the Out parameter of the INT function block.
You can also view any of the internal totalizers or inventories by inspecting their respective transducer
block parameters.
Totalizer and inventory parameter names
Transducer block
Parameter name
Mass totalizer
MEASUREMENT
Mass Total: Value
Volume totalizer
MEASUREMENT
Volume Total: Value
Mass inventory
MEASUREMENT
Mass Inventory: Value
MEASUREMENT
Volume Inventory: Value
MEASUREMENT
Gas Volume Total: Value
Reference volume gas inventory
MEASUREMENT
Gas Volume Inventory: Value
Temperature corrected volume total
API
API Corr Volume Total: Value
Temperature corrected volume inventory
API
API Corr Vol Inventory: Value
Standard volume total
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Std Volume Total: Value
Standard volume inventory(2)
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Std Vol Inventory: Value
Net mass total(2)
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Mass Total: Value
Volume Inventory
Reference volume gas total
(1)
(1)
(2)
Configuration and Use Manual
TB Reference
Totalizer/inventory
PlantWeb Alerts
Table 5-5
113
Operation
Table 5-5
Totalizer and inventory parameter names (continued)
Totalizer/inventory
Transducer block
Parameter name
Net mass inventory(2)
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Mass Inventory: Value
Net volume total(2)
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Volume Total: Value
Net volume inventory(2)
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
CM Net Vol Inventory: Value
(1) Not valid when the petroleum measurement or concentration measurement applications are active.
(2) Not all of these totals are available at one time. The available totals depend on the concentration measurement application
configuration.
With the display
You cannot view totalizers or inventories with the display unless the display has been configured to
show them. Refer to Section 4.18.5.
1. To view totalizer values, Scroll until the process variable TOTAL appears and the units of
measure are:
•
For the mass totalizer, mass units (e.g., kg, lb)
•
For the volume totalizer, volume units (e.g., gal, cuft)
•
For petroleum measurement or concentration measurement totalizers, the mass or volume
unit alternating with the process variable (e.g., TCORR or NET M) (see Table 4-1).
See Figure 5-6. Read the current value from the top line of the display.
2. To view inventory values, Scroll until the process variable TOTAL appears and:
•
For the mass inventory, the word MASSI (Mass Inventory) begins to alternate with the
units of measure
•
For the volume inventory, the word LVOLI (Line Volume Inventory) begins to alternate
with the units of measure
•
For petroleum measurement or concentration measurement inventories, the mass or
volume unit alternating with the process variable (e.g., TCORI or NET VI) (see Table 4-1).
Read the current value from the top line of the display.
114
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Operation
Figure 5-6
Display totalizer
Operation
Current value
Process variable
Units of measure
Scroll optical switch
Select optical switch
Troubleshooting
With ProLink II
To view the current value of the totalizers and inventories with ProLink II, choose:
•
ProLink > Process Variables to view standard totalizers and inventories
•
ProLink > API Process Variables to view API totalizers and inventories
•
ProLink > CM Process Variables to view CM totalizers and inventories
5.5.2
Totalizer and inventory control methods
Function Name
Fieldbus host
ProLink II
Display(1)
Stop all totalizers and inventories
Yes
Yes
Yes
Start all totalizers and inventories
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reset mass or volume totalizer only
Yes
Yes
Yes(2)
Reset API totalizer only
Yes
No
Yes(2)
Reset CM totalizer only
Yes
Yes
Yes(2)
Reset all totalizers
Yes
Yes
No
Reset all inventories
Reset individual inventories
Yes
Yes
(3)
No
(3)
No
Yes
Yes
PlantWeb Alerts
Table 5-6
Controlling the totalizers and inventories
(1) These display functions may be enabled or disabled. See Section 4.18.
(2) This function is available only if the corresponding totalizer is configured as a display variable (see Section 4.18.5).
(3) If enabled in the ProLink II preferences.
If you have set up the INT function block to report the status of one of the internal totalizers (i.e., not
Standard mode) (see Section 2.4), you can reset that totalizer by selecting the INT function block and
setting the OP_CMD_INT method parameter to Reset.
Configuration and Use Manual
115
TB Reference
With a fieldbus host
Operation
You can also control the internal totalizers directly by using the method parameters shown in the
following table.
Table 5-7
Totalizer/inventory control – Fieldbus host
To accomplish this
Select this
transducer block
And use this method parameter
Stop all totalizers and inventories
MEASUREMENT
Stop All Totals
Start all totalizers and inventories
MEASUREMENT
Start Totals
Reset mass totalizer
MEASUREMENT
Reset Mass Total
Reset volume totalizer
MEASUREMENT
Reset Volume Total
Reset gas volume totalizer
MEASUREMENT
Reset Gas Standard Volume Total
Reset API totalizer
API
Reset API Volume Total
Reset CM standard volume totalizer
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM Std Volume Total
Reset CM net mass totalizer
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM Net Mass Total
Reset CM net volume totalizer
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM Net Volume Total
Reset mass inventory
MEASUREMENT
Reset Mass Inventory
Reset volume inventory
MEASUREMENT
Reset Volume Inventory
Reset gas volume inventory
MEASUREMENT
Reset Gas Standard Volume Inventory
Reset API inventory
API
Reset API Inventory
Reset CM standard volume inventory
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM Volume Inventory
Reset CM net mass inventory
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM Net Mass Inventory
Reset CM net volume inventory
CONCENTRATION
MEASUREMENT
Reset CM Net Volume Inventory
Simultaneously reset all totalizers
MEASUREMENT
Reset Totalizers
Simultaneously reset all inventories
MEASUREMENT
Reset Inventories
With ProLink II
To control CM totalizers and inventories, choose ProLink > CM Totalizer Control. To control all
other totalizer and inventory functions, choose ProLink > Totalizer Control.
To reset inventories using ProLink II, you must first enable this capability. To enable inventory reset
using ProLink II:
1. Choose View > Preferences.
2. Select the Enable Inventory Totals Reset checkbox.
3. Click Apply.
With the display
Figure 5-7 shows how you can control the totalizers and inventories with the display.
116
•
Starting or stopping totalizers and inventories will start or stop all totalizers and inventories
simultaneously.
•
Resetting totalizers resets only the totalizer for which the reset is selected. Inventories cannot
be reset using the display.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Operation
Figure 5-7
Display menu — controlling totalizers and inventories
Operation
Process variable
display
Scroll
API total(1)(2)
Mass total display(1)
Scroll
Volume total display(1)
ED total(1)(2)
Select
STOP/START(4)
Select
Select
RESET YES?
STOP/START YES?
Yes
Select
No
Scroll
Yes
Select
Scroll
EXIT
No
Scroll
Displayed only if configured as a display variable (see Section 4.18.5).
The petroleum measurement application or concentration measurement application must be enabled.
The display must be configured to allow totalizer resetting (see Section 4.18).
The display must be configured to allow stopping and starting (see Section 4.18).
PlantWeb Alerts
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Scroll
Troubleshooting
RESET(3)
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
117
118
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
6.1
Operation
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting
Overview
This section describes guidelines and procedures for troubleshooting the flowmeter. The information
in this section will enable you to:
Categorize the problem
•
Determine whether you are able to correct the problem
•
Take corrective measures (if possible)
Note: All procedures provided in this chapter assume that you have established communication with
the transmitter and that you are complying with all applicable safety requirements. See Appendices 2
and 3.
6.2
Guide to troubleshooting topics
Table 6-1
Troubleshooting topics
Topic
Section
Transmitter does not operate
Section 6.3
Transmitter does not communicate
Section 6.4
Zero or calibration failure
Section 6.5
AI block configuration error
Section 6.6
Output problems
Section 6.7
Lost static data alarm
Section 6.8
Status alarms
Section 6.9
Diagnosing wiring problems
Section 6.10
Checking slug flow
Section 6.11
Restoring a working configuration
Section 6.12
Checking the test points
Section 6.13
Checking the core processor
Section 6.14
Checking sensor coils and RTD
Section 6.15
PlantWeb Alerts
Transmitter does not operate
If the transmitter is receiving power but all blocks are out of service, see Section 6.8.
If the transmitter is not receiving power and cannot communicate over the network or display, then
perform all of the procedures under Section 6.10. If the wiring checks do not indicate a problem with
electrical connections, contact the Micro Motion Customer Service Department.
Configuration and Use Manual
119
TB Reference
6.3
Troubleshooting
•
Troubleshooting
6.4
Transmitter does not communicate
If the transmitter fails to communicate:
•
Make sure that the entire fieldbus network is grounded only once (individual segments should
not be grounded).
•
Perform the procedures under Section 6.10.4.
•
If you are using a National Instruments® Configurator, perform the procedures under
Section 6.4.1.
•
Verify the software version by reading the display at power up.
•
Verify the transmitter has fieldbus software loaded into it. At power up, the local display will
briefly flash the revision level. For revision 1.0, 1.0 is displayed. For other revisions, x.x F is
displayed.
6.4.1
National Instruments basic information
To verify the Dlme Basic Info:
1. Launch the National Instruments Interface Configuration Utility.
2. Select the appropriate port, usually Port 0.
3. Click Edit.
4. Click Advanced.
5. Verify the following information:
6.5
•
Slot Time equals 7
•
Max Response Delay equals 3
•
Min Inter-Pdu Delay equals 6
Zero or calibration failure
If a zero or calibration procedure fails, the transmitter will send one or more status alarms indicating
the cause of failure. Refer to Table 6-3 for descriptions of status alarms and possible remedies.
6.6
AI block configuration error
Configuring the measurement units with ProLink II or the display can cause the transmitter’s AI
blocks to get a configuration error unless the AI blocks are also configured for the same measurement
units. This is because ProLink II and the display set measurement units in the MEASUREMENT
transducer block, not in the AI block. Therefore, if the units have been configured with ProLink II or
the display, the AI blocks must be separately configured to match.
See Section 4.4 for more information about configuring measurement units.
120
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
6.7
Output problems
•
Flow rate
•
Density
•
Temperature
•
Tube frequency
•
Pickoff voltage
•
Drive gain
Operation
Micro Motion suggests that you make a record of the process variables listed below, under normal
operating conditions. This will help you recognize when the process variables are unusually high
or low.
Unusual values for process variables may indicate a variety of different problems.
Table 6-2
Output problems and possible remedies
Symptom
Cause
Possible remedies
AI block fault
Measurement units mismatch
Make sure the Transducer Scale: Units
Index parameter matches the units
specified in the transducer block for that
process variable.
No output or incorrect process
variable
AI Channel parameter set incorrectly
Verify the AI Channel parameter in the AI
block matches the correct transducer
block measurement channels.
Steady non-zero flow rate under
no-flow conditions
Misaligned piping (especially in new
installations)
Correct the piping.
Check or correct the valve mechanism.
Bad sensor zero
Rezero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.
Bad flow calibration factor
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
PlantWeb Alerts
Open or leaking valve
Troubleshooting
For troubleshooting, check the process variables under both normal flow and tubes-full no-flow
conditions. Except for flow rate, you should see little or no change between flow and no-flow
conditions. If you see a significant difference, record the values and contact Micro Motion Customer
Service for assistance.
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
121
Troubleshooting
Table 6-2
Output problems and possible remedies (continued)
Symptom
Cause
Possible remedies
Erratic non-zero flow rate under
no-flow conditions
Wiring problem
Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and
ensure the wires are making good
contact. Refer to the installation manual.
Incorrectly grounded 9-wire cable
(only in 9-wire remote and remote
core processor with remote
transmitter installations)
Verify 9-wire cable installation.
Refer to the installation manual.
Noise in fieldbus wiring
Verify that the wiring is properly shielded
against noise. Refer to the installation
manual.
Incorrectly set or bad power
conditioner
See Section 6.7.6.
Vibration in pipeline at rate close to
sensor frequency
Check the environment and remove the
source of vibration.
Erratic non-zero flow rate when flow
is steady
122
Leaking valve or seal
Check pipeline.
Inappropriate measurement unit
Check measurement units using a
fieldbus host.
Inappropriate damping value
Check damping. See Section 6.7.1.
Slug flow
See Section 6.11.
Plugged flow tube
Check drive gain and frequency. Purge the
flow tubes.
Moisture in sensor junction box (only
for 9-wire remote and remote core
processor with remote transmitter
installations)
Open junction box and allow it to dry. Do
not use contact cleaner. When closing,
ensure integrity of gaskets and O-rings,
and grease all O-rings.
Mounting stress on sensor
Check sensor mounting. Ensure that:
• Sensor is not being used to support
pipe.
• Sensor is not being used to correct
misaligned pipe.
• Sensor is not too heavy for pipe.
Sensor cross-talk
Check environment for sensor with similar
(±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.
Improper sensor grounding
Check the sensor grounding. Refer to the
installation manual.
Incorrect sensor orientation
Not all orientations work with all process
fluids. See the installation manual for your
sensor.
Output wiring problem
Verify fieldbus wiring.
Inappropriate measurement unit
Check measurement units using a
fieldbus tool.
Inappropriate damping value
Check damping. See Section 6.7.1.
Excessive or erratic drive gain
See Sections 6.13.3 and 6.13.4.
Slug flow
See Section 6.11.
Plugged flow tube
Check drive gain and tube frequency.
Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to
be replaced.
Wiring problem
Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and
ensure the wires are making good
contact. Refer to the installation manual.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
Table 6-2
Output problems and possible remedies (continued)
Possible remedies
Inaccurate flow rate
Bad flow calibration factor
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Inappropriate measurement unit
Check measurement units using a
fieldbus host.
Bad sensor zero
Rezero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.
Bad density calibration factors
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Bad flowmeter grounding
See Section 6.10.3.
Slug flow
See Section 6.11.
Incorrectly set linearization
See Section 6.7.7.
Wiring problem
Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and
ensure the wires are making good
contact. Refer to the installation manual.
Problem with process fluid
Use standard procedures to check quality
of process fluid.
Inaccurate density reading
Temperature reading significantly
different from process temperature
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Wiring problem
Verify all sensor-to-transmitter wiring and
ensure the wires are making good
contact. Refer to the installation manual.
Bad flowmeter grounding
See Section 6.10.3.
Slug flow
See Section 6.11.
Sensor cross-talk
Check environment for sensor with similar
(±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.
Plugged flow tube
Check drive gain and tube frequency.
Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to
be replaced.
RTD failure
Check for alarm conditions and follow
troubleshooting procedure for indicated
alarm.
Incorrect calibration factors
Perform temperature calibration. See
Section 3.7.
Incorrect calibration factors
Perform temperature calibration. See
Section 3.7.
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Temperature reading slightly different
from process temperature
PlantWeb Alerts
Bad density calibration factors
Troubleshooting
Cause
Operation
Symptom
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Plugged flow tube
Incorrect K2 value
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Unusually low density reading
Slug flow
See Section 6.11.
Incorrect K2 value
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Unusually high tube frequency
Sensor erosion
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Unusually low tube frequency
Plugged flow tube
Check drive gain and tube frequency.
Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to
be replaced.
Unusually low pickoff voltages
Several possible causes
See Section 6.13.5.
Unusually high drive gain
Several possible causes
See Section 6.13.3.
Configuration and Use Manual
Check drive gain and tube frequency.
Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to
be replaced.
123
TB Reference
Unusually high density reading
Troubleshooting
6.7.1
Damping
An incorrectly set damping value may make the transmitter’s output appear too sluggish or too jumpy.
Adjust the Flow Damping, Temperature Damping, and Density Damping parameters in the
MEASUREMENT transducer block to achieve the damping effect you want. See Section 4.12.
Other damping problems
If the transmitter appears to be applying damping values incorrectly or the damping effects do not
appear to be changed by adjustments to the damping parameters in the MEASUREMENT transducer
block, then the Process Value Filter Time parameter in an AI function block may be improperly set.
Inspect each AI function block, and ensure that the Process Value Filter Time parameter is set to zero.
6.7.2
Flow cutoff
If the transmitter is sending an output of zero unexpectedly, then one of the cutoff parameters may be
set incorrectly. See Section 4.14 for more information about configuring cutoffs.
6.7.3
Output scale
An incorrectly configured output scale can cause the transmitter to report unexpected output levels.
Verify that the Transducer Scale and Output Scale values are set up correctly for each AI block. See
Section 4.9.
6.7.4
Characterization
Incorrect characterization parameters can cause the transmitter to send unexpected output values.
However, you should suspect an incorrect characterization only in specific circumstances (e.g.,
pairing the transmitter and sensor together for the first time, replacing the core processor). Refer to
Section 3.3 for more information about characterization.
6.7.5
Calibration
Improper calibration may cause the transmitter to send unexpected output values. However, you
should suspect an improper calibration only if the transmitter has been field-calibrated recently. Refer
to Section 3.2.4 for more information about calibration.
Note: Micro Motion recommends using meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter
against a regulatory standard or to correct measurement error. Contact Micro Motion before
calibrating your flowmeter. Refer to Section 3.5 for information about meter factors.
6.7.6
Fieldbus network power conditioner
An incorrectly set or bad power conditioner can cause inappropriate communication from the
transmitter. For the MTL power conditioner, the red switch (dual redundancy) should be set to Normal
Mode. The yellow switch (termination) should be set to Termination In. If you suspect further
problems with the power conditioner, contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
6.7.7
Linearization
The linearization parameter in each AI function block can affect the transmitter’s output. Verify that
the Linearization Type parameter is set correctly. See Section 4.8.
124
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
6.8
EEPROM Checksum Error
Use Reset Processor method of the Micro Motion Load Utility to reset all resource blocks and
function blocks are initialize.
6.9
Operation
After performing an EEPROM initialization (Initialize NVM) using the Micro Motion Load Utility,
the resource block may be out of service.
Status alarms
Status alarms are reported by a fieldbus host, the display, and ProLink II.
Table 6-3
Status alarms and remedies
Alarm
code
Description
Possible remedies
A001
(E)EPROM Checksum Error (CP)
Cycle power to the transmitter.
A002
RAM Error (CP)
Cycle power to the transmitter.
The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A003
Sensor Failure
Troubleshooting
The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
Check wiring to sensor. See Section 6.10.2.
Check for slug flow. See Section 6.11.
Check sensor tubes.
A004
Temperature Sensor Failure
Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
PlantWeb Alerts
Check wiring to sensor. See Section 6.10.2.
Verify process temperature range is within limits for
sensor and transmitter.
Verify flowmeter characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A005
Input Overrange
Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
Verify process conditions.
Verify that transmitter is configured to use appropriate
measurement units. See Section 4.4.
Verify flowmeter characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Re-zero the flowmeter. See Section 2.7.
A006
Not Configured
Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the FCF
and K1 values. See Section 3.3.
TB Reference
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A008
Density Overrange
Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
Check for air in flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign
material in tubes, coating in tubes.
Verify characterization. See Section 6.7.4.
Configuration and Use Manual
125
Troubleshooting
Table 6-3
Status alarms and remedies (continued)
Alarm
code
Description
Possible remedies
A009
Transmitter Initializing/warming Up
Allow the transmitter to warm up. The error should
disappear from the status words once the transmitter is
ready for normal operation. If alarm does not clear, make
sure sensor is completely full or completely empty. Verify
sensor configuration and transmitter wiring to sensor
(refer to installation manual).
A010
Calibration Failure
If alarm appears during zero, ensure there is no flow
through the sensor, then retry.
Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.
A011
Cal - Too Low
Ensure there is no flow through sensor, then retry.
Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.
A012
Cal - Too High
Ensure there is no flow through sensor, then retry.
Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.
A013
Cal - Too Noisy
Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise,
then attempt the calibration or zero procedure again.
Possible sources of noise include:
• Mechanical pumps
• Electrical interference
• Vibration effects from nearby machinery
Cycle power to the flowmeter, then retry.
A014
Transmitter Failed
Cycle power to the transmitter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A016
Line RTD Temperature Out-of-Range
Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
Check wiring to sensor. Refer to installation manual.
Make sure the appropriate sensor type is configured.
See Section 3.3.1.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A017
Meter RTD Temperature Out-of-Range
Check the test points. See Section 6.13.
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A018
(E)EPROM Checksum Error
Cycle power to the transmitter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A019
RAM or ROM Test Error
Cycle power to the transmitter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A020
Calibration Factors Unentered
Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the FCF
value. See Section 3.3.
A021
Incorrect Sensor Type (K1)
Check the characterization. Specifically, verify the K1
value. See Section 3.3.
A025
Protected Boot Sector Fault (CP)
Cycle power to the meter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact
Micro Motion Customer Service.
126
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
Table 6-3
Status alarms and remedies (continued)
Description
Possible remedies
A026
Sensor/Transmitter Communication Error
Check wiring between transmitter and core processor
(see Section 6.10.2). The wires may be swapped. After
swapping wires, cycle power to the flowmeter.
Operation
Alarm
code
Check for noise in wiring or transmitter environment.
Check core processor LED. See Section 6.14.2.
Perform the core processor resistance test. See
Section 6.14.3.
A028
Core Processor Write Failure
Cycle power to the meter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact
Micro Motion Customer Service.
Low Power
The core processor is not receiving enough power.
Check the power supply to the transmitter, and check
power wiring between the transmitter and the core
processor (4-wire remote installations only).
A032
Smart Meter Verification In Progress and
Outputs Fixed
Allow the procedure to complete.
A033
Sensor OK / Tubes Stopped by Process
No signal from LPO or RPO, suggesting that sensor
tubes are not vibrating. Verify process. Check for air in
the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in tubes,
or coating in tubes.
A034
Smart Meter Verification Failed
Rerun the test. If the test fails again, see Section 3.4.3.
A035
Smart Meter Verification Aborted
If desired, read the abort code. See Section 3.4.3, and
perform the appropriate action.
A102
Drive Overrange/Partially Full Tube
Excessive or erratic drive gain. See Section 6.13.3.
If desired, abort the procedure and restart with outputs
set to Continue Measurement.
Troubleshooting
A031
Check the sensor coils. See Section 6.15.
Data Loss Possible (Tot and Inv)
Cycle power to the transmitter.
The transmitter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
A104
Calibration-in-Progress
Allow the flowmeter to complete calibration.
A105
Slug Flow
Allow slug flow to clear from the process.
PlantWeb Alerts
A103
See Section 6.11.
A106
AI/AO Simulation Active
Disable simulation mode. See Section 5.3.1.
A107
Power Reset Occurred
No action is necessary.
A116
API: Temperature Outside Standard Range
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A117
API: Density Outside Standard Range
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A120
CM: Unable to Fit Curve Data
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A121
CM: Extrapolation Alarm
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
A128
Factory configuration data invalid
Cycle power to the transmitter.
A0129
Factory configuration data checksum invalid
Cycle power to the transmitter.
The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.s
Configuration and Use Manual
127
TB Reference
The flowmeter might need service. Contact Micro Motion
Customer Service.
Troubleshooting
Table 6-3
Status alarms and remedies (continued)
Alarm
code
Description
Possible remedies
A131
Smart Meter Verification In Progress
Allow the procedure to complete.
If desired, abort the procedure and restart with outputs
set to Fault.
A132
6.10
Simulation Mode Active (sensor)
Disable sensor simulation mode. See Section 5.3.2.
Diagnosing wiring problems
Use the procedures in this section to check the transmitter installation for wiring problems.
Installation procedures are provided in the Model 1700 and Model 2700 Transmitters: Installation
Manual.
WARNING
Removing the wiring compartment covers in explosive atmospheres while
the power is on can cause an explosion.
Before removing the field wiring compartment cover in explosive atmospheres,
shut off the power and wait five minutes.
6.10.1
Checking the power-supply wiring
To check the power-supply wiring:
1. Verify that the correct external fuse is used. An incorrect fuse can limit current to the
transmitter and keep it from initializing.
2. Power down the transmitter.
3. If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes.
4. Ensure that the power supply wires are connected to the correct terminals. Refer to the
installation manual.
5. Verify that the power-supply wires are making good contact and are not clamped to the wire
insulation.
6. Inspect the voltage label on the inside of the field-wiring compartment. Verify that the voltage
supplied to the transmitter matches the voltage specified on the label.
7. Use a voltmeter to test the voltage at the transmitter’s power supply terminals. Verify that it is
within specified limits. For DC power, you may need to size the cable. Refer to the installation
manual.
128
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
6.10.2
Checking the sensor-to-transmitter wiring
Note: This does not apply to flowmeters with an integrally mounted transmitter.
•
The transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the wiring information provided in the
installation manual.
•
The wires are making good contact with the terminals.
•
For 4-wire connections, the mating connector between the core processor and the transmitter is
securely plugged into its socket.
Operation
To check the sensor-to-transmitter wiring, verify that:
If the wires are incorrectly connected:
1. Power down the transmitter.
2. Wait five minutes before opening the transmitter compartment if the transmitter is in a
hazardous area.
4. Restore power to the transmitter.
6.10.3
Checking the grounding
The sensor and the transmitter must be grounded. If the core processor is installed as part of the
transmitter or the sensor, it is grounded automatically. If the core processor is installed separately, it
must be grounded separately. Refer to the installation manual.
6.10.4
Troubleshooting
3. Correct the wiring.
Checking the communication wiring
To check the communication wiring, verify that:
Communication wires and connections meet FOUNDATION fieldbus wiring standards.
•
Wires are connected according to instructions provided in the installation manual.
•
Wires are making good contact with the terminals.
PlantWeb Alerts
6.11
•
Checking slug flow
The dynamics of slug flow are described in Section 4.13. If the transmitter is reporting a slug flow
alarm, first check the process and possible mechanical causes for the alarm:
•
Actual changes in process density
•
Cavitation or flashing
•
Leaks
•
Sensor orientation — sensor tubes should normally be down when measuring liquids, and up
when measuring gases. Refer to the sensor documentation for more information about
orientation.
Configuration and Use Manual
129
TB Reference
If there are no mechanical causes for the slug flow alarm, the slow flow limits and duration may be set
too high or too low. The high limit is set by default to 5.0 g/cm3, and the low limit is set by default to
0.0 g/cm3. Lowering the high limit or raising the low limit will cause the transmitter to be more
sensitive to changes in density. If you expect occasional slug flow in your process, you may need to
increase the slug flow duration. A longer slug flow duration will make the transmitter more tolerant of
slug flow.
Troubleshooting
6.12
Restoring a working configuration
At times it may be easier to start from a known working configuration than to troubleshoot the
existing configuration. To do this, you can:
•
Restore a configuration file saved via ProLink II, if one is available. In ProLink II, choose
File > Send to Xmtr from File.
•
Restore the factory configuration (transmitter must be connected to an enhanced core
processor).
Neither of these methods will restore all of the transmitter’s configuration. For example, neither
method will restore the configuration of the AI, AO, and INT blocks. Using the restore factory
configuration option will also not restore such things as the configuration of the display.
Figure 6-1
Restore factory configuration
ProLink >
Configuration
Device (Fieldbus) tab
Restore Factory
Configuration
6.13
Checking the test points
You can diagnose sensor failure or overrange status alarms by checking the flowmeter test points. The
test points include left and right pickoff voltages, drive gain, and tube frequency.
6.13.1
Obtaining the test points
You can obtain the test points with a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
With a fieldbus host
The test points are a set of clearly-named parameters in the DIAGNOSTIC transducer block:
•
Left pickoff voltage
•
Right pickoff voltage
•
Tube frequency
•
Drive Gain: Value
With ProLink II
To obtain the test points with ProLink II:
1. Choose ProLink > Diagnostic Information.
2. Write down the value you find in the Tube Frequency box, the Left Pickoff box, the Right
Pickoff box, and the Drive Gain box.
130
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
6.13.2
Evaluating the test points
Use the following guidelines to evaluate the test points:
If the drive gain is at 100%, refer to Section 6.13.3.
•
If the drive gain is unstable, refer to Section 6.13.4.
•
If the value for the left or right pickoff does not equal the appropriate value from Table 6-4,
based on the sensor flow tube frequency, refer to Section 6.13.5.
•
If the values for the left and right pickoffs equal the appropriate values from Table 6-4, based
on the sensor flow tube frequency, contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
Table 6-4
Operation
•
Sensor pickoff values
Pickoff value
ELITE Model CMF sensors
3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model CMF400 I.S.
2.7 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model CMF400 with booster amplifier
3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model D, DL, and DT sensors
3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model F025, F050, and F100 sensors
3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model F200 sensors (compact case)
2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model F200 sensors (standard case)
3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model H025, H050, and H100 sensors
3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model H200 sensors
2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model R025, R050, or R100 sensor
3.4 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Model R200 sensor
2.0 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Micro Motion T-Series sensors
0.5 mV peak to peak per Hz based on flow tube frequency
Troubleshooting
Sensor model(1)
(1) If your sensor model is not listed, contact Micro Motion Customer Support.
Table 6-5
PlantWeb Alerts
6.13.3
Excessive drive gain
Excessive drive gain causes and solutions
Cause
Solution
Excessive slug flow
Eliminate slugs.
Change the sensor orientation.
Plugged flow tube
Purge the flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.
Cavitation or flashing
Increase inlet or back pressure at the sensor.
If a pump is located upstream from the sensor,
increase the distance between the pump and sensor.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Mechanical binding at sensor
Ensure sensor is free to vibrate.
Open drive or left pickoff sensor coil
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Flow rate out of range
Ensure flow rate is within sensor limits.
Incorrect sensor characterization
Verify characterization. See Section 3.3.
Configuration and Use Manual
TB Reference
Drive board or module failure, cracked
flow tube, or sensor imbalance
131
Troubleshooting
6.13.4
Table 6-6
Erratic drive gain
Erratic drive gain causes and solutions
Cause
Solution
Wrong K1 characterization constant for sensor
Re-enter the K1 characterization constant. See
Section 3.3.
Polarity of pick-off reversed or polarity of
drive reversed
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Slug flow
Verify flow tubes are completely filled with process
fluid, and that slug flow limits and duration are properly
configured. See Section 6.11.
Foreign material caught in flow tubes
Purge flow tubes. Sensor may need to be replaced.
6.13.5
Table 6-7
Low pickoff voltage
Low pickoff voltage causes and solutions
Cause
Solution
Faulty wiring runs between the sensor and core
processor
Refer to the sensor manual and the transmitter
installation manual.
Process flow rate beyond the limits of the sensor
Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of
the sensor
Slug flow
Verify the flow tubes are completely filled with process
fluid, and that slug flow limits and duration are properly
configured. See Section 6.11.
No tube vibration in sensor
Check for plugging.
Ensure sensor is free to vibrate (no mechanical
binding).
Verify wiring.
Test coils at sensor. See Section 6.15.
132
Process beyond the limits of the sensor
Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of
the sensor.
Moisture in the sensor electronics
Eliminate the moisture in the sensor electronics.
The sensor is damaged
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
6.14
Checking the core processor
Two core processor procedures are available:
You can check the core processor LED. The core processor has an LED that indicates different
flowmeter conditions.
•
You can perform the core processor resistance test to check for a damaged core processor.
Operation
•
For both tests you will need to expose the core processor.
6.14.1
Exposing the core processor
Follow these procedures to expose the core processor.
1. Determine your installation type. See Appendix D.
3. If you have an integral installation:
a. Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base (Figure 6-2).
b. Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked
position.
Troubleshooting
2. If you have a 4-wire remote installation or a remote core processor with remote transmitter
installation, simply remove the core processor lid. The core processor is intrinsically safe and
can be opened in all environments.
c. Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the cap screws. Do not
disconnect or damage the wires that connect the transmitter to the core processor.
4. If you have a 9-wire remote installation:
a. Remove the end-cap.
b. Inside the core processor housing, loosen the three screws that hold the core processor
mounting plate in place. Do not remove the screws. Rotate the mounting plate so that the
screws are in the unlocked position.
Figure 6-2
Integral installation components
PlantWeb Alerts
c. Holding the tab on the mounting plate, slowly lower the mounting plate so that the top of
the core processor is visible. Do not disconnect or damage the wires that connect the core
processor to the transmitter.
Transmitter
Core processor
TB Reference
4 × cap screws
When reassembling components, take care not to pinch or stress the wires. Grease all O-rings.
Configuration and Use Manual
133
Troubleshooting
6.14.2
Checking the core processor LED
Do not shut off power to the transmitter when checking the core processor LED. To check the core
processor LED:
1. Expose the core processor according to the instructions in Section 6.14.1.
2. Check the core processor LED against the conditions listed in Table 6-8 (standard core
processor) or Table 6-9 (enhanced core processor).
Table 6-8
Standard core processor LED behavior, flowmeter conditions, and remedies
LED behavior
Condition
Possible remedy
1 flash per second
(75% off, 25% on)
Normal operation
No action required
1 flash per second
(25% off, 75% on)
Slug flow
See Section 6.11.
Solid on
Zero or calibration in
progress
If zero or calibration procedure is in progress, no action is
required. If these procedures are not in progress, contact Micro
Motion Customer Service.
Core processor
receiving between
11.5 and 5 volts
Check power supply to transmitter. See Section 6.10.1.
Sensor not
recognized
Check wiring between transmitter and sensor (9-wire remote
installation or remote core processor with remote transmitter
installation). Refer to the installation manual.
Improper
configuration
Verify characterization. See Section 3.3.
Broken pin between
sensor and core
processor
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
3 rapid flashes
followed by a pause
4 flashes per second Fault condition
Check alarm status.
OFF
Verify power supply wiring to core processor. Refer to the
installation manual.
Core processor
receiving less than
5 volts
If status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power. Check voltage
across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in core processor.
Normal reading is approximately 14 VDC. If reading is normal,
internal core processor failure is possible — contact Micro Motion
Customer Service. If reading is 0, internal transmitter failure is
possible — contact Micro Motion Customer Service. If reading is
less than 1 VDC, verify power supply wiring to core processor.
Wires may be switched. Refer to the installation manual.
If status LED is not lit, transmitter is not receiving power. Check
power supply. If power supply is operational, internal transmitter,
display, or LED failure is possible. Contact Micro Motion Customer
Service.
Core processor
internal failure
Table 6-9
134
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Enhanced core processor LED behavior, meter conditions, and remedies
LED behavior
Condition
Possible remedy
Solid green
Normal operation
No action required.
Flashing yellow
Zero in progress
If calibration is in progress, no action required. If no
calibration is in progress, contact Micro Motion.
Solid yellow
Low severity alarm
Check alarm status.
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
Table 6-9
Enhanced core processor LED behavior, meter conditions, and remedies (continued)
Possible remedy
Solid red
High severity alarm
Check alarm status.
Flashing red (80% on,
20% off)
Tubes not full
Flashing red (50% on,
50% off)
Electronics failed
Contact Micro Motion.
Flashing red (50% on,
50% off, skips every
4th)
Sensor failed
Contact Micro Motion.
OFF
Core processor
receiving less than 5
volts
• Verify power supply wiring to core processor. Refer to
Appendix D for diagrams.
• If transmitter status LED is lit, transmitter is receiving power.
Check voltage across terminals 1 (VDC+) and 2 (VDC–) in
core processor. If reading is less than 1 VDC, verify power
supply wiring to core processor. Wires may be switched.
See Section 6.10.1. Otherwise, contact Micro Motion.
• If transmitter status LED is not lit, transmitter is not
receiving power. Check power supply. See Section 6.10.1.
If power supply is operational, internal transmitter, display,
or LED failure is possible. Contact Micro Motion.
Core processor
internal failure
Contact Micro Motion.
6.14.3
If alarm A105 (slug flow) is active, see Section 6.11.
If alarm A033 (tubes not full) is active, verify process. Check
for air in the flow tubes, tubes not filled, foreign material in
tubes, or coating in tubes.
Troubleshooting
Condition
Operation
LED behavior
Core processor resistance test
To perform the core processor resistance test:
1. Disconnect power to the transmitter and core processor.
3. Measure the resistance across the following terminal pairs:
•
The resistance across terminals 3 and 4 (RS-485A and RS-485B) should be 40–50 kohms.
•
The resistance across terminals 2 and 3 (VDC– and RS-485A) should be 20–25 kohms.
•
The resistance across terminals 2 and 4 (VDC– and RS-485B) should be 20–25 kohms.
PlantWeb Alerts
2. Expose the core processor according to the instructions in Section 6.14.1.
If any of the resistance measurements are lower than specified, the core processor may not be able to
communicate with a transmitter or remote host. Contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
135
Troubleshooting
6.15
Checking sensor coils and RTD
Problems with sensor coils can cause several alarms, including sensor failure and a variety of
out-of-range conditions. Checking the sensor coils involves testing the terminal pairs and testing for
shorts to case.
6.15.1
9-wire remote or remote core processor with remote transmitter installation
If you have a 9-wire remote or a remote core processor with remote transmitter installation:
1. Power down the transmitter.
2. If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes.
3. Remove the end-cap from the core processor housing.
4. Unplug the terminal blocks from the terminal board.
5. Using a digital multimeter (DMM), check the circuits listed in the following table by placing
the DMM leads on the unplugged terminal blocks for each terminal pair.
Table 6-10 Circuit terminal pairs
Circuit
Test terminal pair
Drive coil
Brown to red
Left pickoff coil (LPO)
Green to white
Right pickoff coil (RPO)
Blue to gray
Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
Yellow to violet
Lead length compensator (LLC) (All sensors except CMF400 IS and T-Series)
Composite RTD (T-Series only)
Fixed resistor (CMF400 IS only)
Yellow to orange
6. There should be no open circuits (i.e., no infinite resistance readings). The LPO and RPO
readings should be the same or very close (±5 ohms). If there are any unusual readings, repeat
the coil measurement tests at the sensor junction box to eliminate the possibility of faulty
cable. The readings for each coil pair should match at both ends.
If the cable is faulty, replace the cable.
7. Leave the core processor terminal blocks disconnected. At the sensor, remove the lid of the
junction box and test each sensor terminal for a short to case by placing one DMM lead on the
terminal and the other lead on the sensor case. With the DMM set to its highest range, there
should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short to
case.
136
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
8. Test the terminal pairs as follows:
Brown against all other terminals except Red
•
Red against all other terminals except Brown
•
Green against all other terminals except White
•
White against all other terminals except Green
•
Blue against all other terminals except Gray
•
Gray against all other terminals except Blue
•
Orange against all other terminals except Yellow and Violet
•
Yellow against all other terminals except Orange and Violet
•
Violet against all other terminals except Yellow and Orange
Operation
•
Note: D600 sensors and CMF400 sensors with booster amplifiers have different terminal pairs.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
9. Check for possible causes and solutions.
Table 6-11 Sensor and cable short to case possible causes and remedies
Possible cause
Solution
Moisture inside the sensor junction box
Make sure that the junction box is dry and no corrosion is
present.
Liquid or moisture inside the sensor case
Contact Micro Motion.
Internally shorted feedthrough (sealed passage for
wiring from sensor to sensor junction box)
Contact Micro Motion.
Replace cable.
Improper wire termination
Verify wire terminations inside sensor junction box. See the
Micro Motion 9-Wire Flowmeter Cable Preparation and
Installation Guide or the sensor documentation.
10. If the problem is not resolved, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
Note: When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
6.15.2
PlantWeb Alerts
Faulty cable
Troubleshooting
There should be infinite resistance for each pair. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short
between terminals.
4-wire remote or integral installation
If you have a 4-wire remote installation or an integral installation:
1. Power down the transmitter.
2. If the transmitter is in a hazardous environment, wait five minutes.
3. If you have a 4-wire remote installation, remove the core processor lid.
TB Reference
4. If you have an integral installation:
a. Loosen the four cap screws that fasten the transmitter to the base (Figure 6-2).
b. Rotate the transmitter counter-clockwise so that the cap screws are in the unlocked
position.
c. Gently lift the transmitter straight up, disengaging it from the base.
Note: You have the option of disconnecting the 4-wire cable or leaving it connected.
Configuration and Use Manual
137
Troubleshooting
5. If you have a standard core processor, loosen the captive screw (2,5 mm) at the center of the
core processor. Carefully remove the core processor from the sensor by grasping it and lifting
it straight up. Do not twist or rotate the core processor.
6. If you have an enhanced core processor, loosen the two captive screws (2,5 mm) that hold the
core processor in the housing. Gently lift the core processor out of the housing, then
disconnect the sensor cable from the feedthrough pins. Do not damage the feedthrough pins.
CAUTION
If the core processor (feedthrough) pins are bent, broken, or damaged in
any way, the core processor will not operate.
To avoid damage to the core processor (feedthrough) pins:
•
•
Do not twist or rotate the core processor when lifting it.
When replacing the core processor (or sensor cable) on the pins, be sure to
align the guide pins and mount the core processor (or sensor cable) carefully.
7. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to check the resistance across the right and left pickoff coils.
See Figure 6-3. Neither pair should be an open circuit (i.e., infinite resistance). The resistance
values should be the same or very close (±5 ohms).
8. Use the DMM to check the resistance across the RTD and LLC (lead length compensation)
circuits. See Figure 6-3. Neither pair should be an open circuit (i.e., infinite resistance).
9. Test for a ground to case by checking the resistance between each pin and the sensor case.
With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there
is any resistance at all, there is a short to case.
If a short to case is indicated, check for moisture or corrosion. If you are unable to determine
the source of the problem, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
10. Test for shorts across terminals by testing resistance across the following terminal pairs (see
Figures 6-3 and 6-4). There should be infinite resistance in each case. If there is any resistance
at all, there is a short between the terminals.
•
Brown against all other terminals except Red
•
Red against all other terminals except Brown
•
Green against all other terminals except White
•
White against all other terminals except Green
•
Blue against all other terminals except Gray
•
Gray against all other terminals except Blue
•
Orange against all other terminals except Yellow and Violet
•
Yellow against all other terminals except Orange and Violet
•
Violet against all other terminals except Yellow and Orange
Note: D600 sensors and CMF400 sensors with booster amplifiers have different terminal pairs.
Contact Micro Motion Customer Service for assistance.
If a short between terminals is indicated, contact Micro Motion Customer Service.
138
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-3
Sensor pins – Standard core processor
Operation
Right pickoff
(–)
Right pickoff
(+)
Lead length compensator(1)
(+)
Left pickoff
(–)
Resistance temperature detector return /
Lead length compensator
(common)
Left pickoff
(+)
Resistance temperature detector
(+)
Drive
(–)
Troubleshooting
Drive
(+)
(1) LLC for all sensors except T-Series and CMF400 I.S. For T-Series sensors, functions as
composite RTD. For CMF400 I.S. sensors, functions as fixed resistor.
Figure 6-4
Sensor pins – Enhanced core processor
Drive –
Drive +
Return for RTD, LLC,
composite RTD, or fixed
resistor
LLC / Composite RTD /
Fixed resistor(1)
PlantWeb Alerts
RTD +
Right pickoff +
Left pickoff –
Left pickoff +
Right pickoff –
(1) Lead length compensator (LLC) for all sensors except T-Series, CMF400 I.S., and F300. For T-Series sensors,
functions as composite RTD. For CMF400 I.S. and F300 sensors, functions as fixed resistor.
Note: The pins are shown as they appear while looking at the feedthrough on the sensor.
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
139
Troubleshooting
Reinstalling the core processor
If you removed the core processor, replace the core processor according to the instructions below.
1. If you have a standard core processor:
a. Align the three guide pins on the bottom of the core processor with the corresponding
holes in the base of the core processor housing.
b. Carefully mount the core processor on the pins, taking care not to bend any pins.
2. If you have an enhanced core processor:
a. Plug the sensor cable onto the feedthrough pins, being careful not to bend or damage any
pins.
b. Replace the core processor in the housing.
3. Tighten the captive screw(s) to 6 to 8 in-lbs (0,7 to 0,9 N-m) of torque.
4. If you have a 4-wire remote installation, replace the core processor lid.
5. If you have an integral installation:
a. Gently lower the transmitter onto the base, inserting the cap screws into the slots. Do not
pinch or stress the wires.
b. Rotate the transmitter clockwise so that the cap screws are in the locked position.
c. Tighten the cap screws, torquing to 20 to 30 in-lbs (2,3 to 3,4 N-m).
Note: When reassembling the flowmeter components, grease all O-rings.
140
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
A.1
Operation
Appendix A
PlantWeb Alerts
PlantWeb Alerts explained
Intelligent Emerson field devices (such as the Micro Motion Model 2700 with FOUNDATION fieldbus)
possess advanced diagnostic features. PlantWeb Alerts help operators take control of this diagnostic
information by informing the operator of device issues and providing support guidance for dealing
with these issues.
A.2
•
Advisory – Allow maintenance to address a problem before it impacts operations. These alerts
are presented to maintenance personnel as an aid to maintenance planning.
•
Maintenance – Indicate a malfunction has occurred (or is about to occur), and what the effects
might be.
•
Failed – Indicate a failure has occurred which renders the device inoperative.
Troubleshooting
PlantWeb Alerts are divided into three categories:
Setting PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-1
Setting PlantWeb Alerts
Default alert
category
Density out of
range
The measured density has
exceeded the sensor
defined limits.
Failed
D1, D2, K1, K2, FD,
DTC, Tube Frequency,
Drive Gain, LPO,
RPO, process density
Mass flow out
of range
The measured mass flow
has exceeded the sensor
defined limits.
Failed
Process flow rate
Calibration
failed
The calibration attempted
by the user failed.
Failed
Process flow rate,
process density,
process temperature
Tube not full
There is no signal from the
left or right pickoffs.
Failed
Tube Frequency, Drive
Gain, LPO, RPO,
process density
Slug flow
Entrained gas in a liquid
process or condensation in
a gas process has caused
the density to exceed the
configured slug limits.
Maintenance
Slug Low Limit (0.0),
Slug High Limit (5.0),
Slug Duration (1.0),
Drive Gain, process
density
Drive out of
range
The drive needed to
operate the sensors has
exceeded the optimal
point.
Maintenance
Drive Gain, LPO,
RPO, process density
Configuration and Use Manual
Guidelines for setting
Refer to Section 3.2.1 for
characterization information.
See Section 6.5.
Refer to Sections 4.13 and
6.11 for more information
about slug flow.
TB Reference
What the alert is
detecting
PlantWeb Alerts
Related
parameters (and
defaults)
PlantWeb
Alert
141
PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-1
Setting PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
PlantWeb
Alert
What the alert is
detecting
Default alert
category
Related
parameters (and
defaults)
API: Process
variable out of
range
The process temperature
or density is outside the
API-defined extrapolation
limits.
Maintenance
None
Sensor not
responding
The sensor is not
functioning properly.
Failed
LPO, RPO, Live Zero,
Drive Gain, Tube
Frequency
Sensor
temperature
out of range
Either the temperature
reading from the RTD on
the sensor tube or sensor
case is outside the normal
operating limits.
Failed
Line RTD, Meter RTD,
process temperature
Transmitter not
characterized
The transmitter has not
had the proper flow or
density calibration
parameters entered from
the sensor tag or flow
calibration sheet.
Failed
K1, K2, FCF
Refer to Section 3.3 for
characterization information.
CM: Unable to
fit curve data
The data entered as inputs
to the curve fit yield
unacceptable errors in the
fit.
Failed
CM curve parameters
Refer to Section 4.7.
Smart Meter
Verification
failed
The Smart Meter
Verification procedure has
unexpectedly failed.
Maintenance
None
Smart Meter
Verification
aborted
The Smart Meter
Verification procedure was
aborted by the user.
Maintenance
None
CM:
Extrapolation
alarm
The process temperature
or process density is
outside the user-defined
extrapolation limits.
Maintenance
Process density,
process temperature
Calibration in
progress
There is a calibration (zero,
density, temperature, or
Meter Verification) in
progress. If Meter
Verification is in progress,
the outputs are held at last
measured value.
Advisory
Sensor
simulate active
Sensor simulate mode is
active.
Advisory
None
Electronics
failure Device
The core processor or
transmitter has
experienced either an
EEPROM, RAM, boot
sector or real-timer
interrupt failure.
Failed
None
Electronics
failure ASIC
Transmitter RAM Error,
Manufacturing Block
checksum fail
Failed
None
Transmitter
initializing/
warming up
The transmitter is
undergoing its initial
startup routines.
Failed
None
142
Guidelines for setting
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-1
Setting PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
Related
parameters (and
defaults)
Core
processor/
transmitter
communication
failure
There is a communication
failure between the core
processor and the
transmitter.
Failed
None
ECP low
power
The enhanced core
processor is not receiving
enough power.
Failed
None
Possible data
loss
The core processor was
unable to successfully
store the totalizers on the
last power down.
Maintenance
None
Electronics
failure Hornet
Perform Restart Processor.
If problem persists, call
Micro Motion
Failed
None
NV Memory
Failure
Perform Restart Processor.
If problem persists, call
Micro Motion
Failed
Failed
Check function
Check Transducer Block
Mode
Advisory
Advisory
Factory
configuration
checksum
invalid
Factory configuration data
check sum is failed. The
data might be corrupted.
Failed
Failed
Factory
configuration
invalid
The Factory configuration
data is changed.You can
save the current
configuration as factory
configuration
Advisory
Advisory
A.3
Guidelines for setting
Refer to Product Data Sheet
for transmitter power
requirements.
Temperature over range
missing.
Using PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-2 shows information required for using PlantWeb Alerts with the Micro Motion Model 2700
with FOUNDATION fieldbus. Table A-3 shows the status of AI and AO block outputs under various
combinations of transducer block modes and PlantWeb Alerts.
PlantWeb Alerts
Default alert
category
Troubleshooting
What the alert is
detecting
Operation
PlantWeb
Alert
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
143
PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-2
Using PlantWeb Alerts
Default
alert
category
PlantWeb
Alert
What the Alert is
detecting
Density out of
range
The measured density has
exceeded the sensor defined
limits.
Failed
Density measurement
unavailable.
• Check for partially filled
or blocked flow tubes.
• Check process to ensure
density is correct.
• Verify all characterization
parameters are correct,
especially density
factors.
• Perform a density
calibration.
Mass flow out of
range
The measured mass flow
has exceeded the sensor
defined limits.
Failed
Mass flow measurement
unavailable.
• Check process to ensure
mass flow is correct.
• Verify characterization
parameters are correct.
• Zero the flowmeter.
Calibration failed
The zero or density
calibration attempted by the
user failed.
Failed
Device may not be
properly calibrated or
zeroed.
• If zeroing, verify there is
no flow.
• If performing an FD cal,
verify there is sufficient
flow.
• Cycle power to the
transmitter, then try
recalibrating the
transmitter.
• Eliminate mechanical
noise.
Tube not full
There is no signal from the
left or right pickoffs.
Failed
Measurements are
wrong or erratic.
Check for air in the flow
tubes, tubes not filled,
foreign material in tubes,
or coating in tubes.
Slug flow
Entrained gas in a liquid
process or condensation in a
gas process has caused the
density to exceed the
configured slug limits.
Maintenance
Measurements may be
incorrect. If temporary or
expected, this can be
ignored.
In a liquid process, check
process for cavitation,
flashing or leaks. In a gas
process, check
temperature and pressure
to verify gas is not
condensing. If slug
condition occurred while
batching, actual product
delivered may not match
target. Monitor density and
try to resolve process
problems. If slug condition
persists, reconfigure slug
limits and/or slug timeout.
Drive out of range
The drive needed to operate
the sensors has exceeded
the optimal point.
Maintenance
Flowmeter continues to
function normally, but
there may be a problem.
• Purge the flow tubes
• Increase inlet or back
pressure at the sensor
• Change sensor
orientation
• If no other alert is active,
this condition can be
ignored.
API: Process
variable out of
range
The process temperature or
density is outside the
API-defined extrapolation
limits.
Maintenance
API measurements may
be incorrect.
Check the API
configuration.
144
Effect on device
Recommended
action/help
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-2
Using PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
Operation
Default
alert
category
Sensor not
responding
The sensor is not functioning
properly.
Failed
Incorrect or unusable
data.
• Check sensor wiring.
• Check test points.
• Purge flow tubes.
Sensor
temperature out
of range
Either the temperature
reading from the RTD on the
sensor tube or sensor case
is outside the normal
operating limits.
Failed
Bad temperature
reading. This may
adversely affect CM and
API variables.
• Verify characterization
parameters are correct.
• Check sensor wiring.
There may be an open or
short lead length
compensator or an open
or short RTD in the
sensor. If open or short
is at transmitter, repair. If
open or short is at
sensor, return to Micro
Motion.
• Verify process fluid
temperature is within
sensor specifications.
Transmitter not
characterized
The transmitter has not had
the proper flow or density
calibration parameters
entered from the sensor tag
or flow calibration sheet.
Failed
Measurements may be
incorrect.
Check the
characterization.
Specifically, verify the Flow
Cal Factors, K1 and K2
values.
CM: Unable to fit
curve data
The data entered as inputs
Failed
to the curve fit yield
unacceptable errors in the fit.
This CM curve is not
usable.
Check the curve data.
Meter verification
in progress
The meter verification
routine is in progress.
Failed
Outputs held at last
measured values.
Wait until meter verification
routine is complete.
CM: Extrapolation
alarm
The process temperature or
process density is outside
the user-defined
extrapolation limits.
Maintenance
CM variables may be
incorrect or unusable.
Check enhanced density
configuration data.
Calibration in
progress
There is a calibration (zero,
density, temperature, or
meter verification) in
progress.
Advisory
If meter verification is in
progress, the outputs
are held at last
measured values.
Otherwise, no effect.
Allow the calibration to
complete.
Sensor simulate
active
Sensor simulate mode is
active.
Advisory
Outputs are fixed.
Disable sensor simulate
mode.
Transmitter
initializing/
warming up
The transmitter is
undergoing its initial startup
routines.
Failed
Temporary unavailability.
A valid measurement
cannot be calculated
until the startup phase is
complete.
Allow the transmitter to
warm up. The error should
go away when the
transmitter is ready for
normal operation.
Electronics
failure Device
The core processor or
transmitter has experienced
either an EEPROM, RAM,
boot sector or real-timer
interrupt failure.
Failed
None
Electronics
failure Hornet
Perform Restart Processor.
If problem persists, call
Micro Motion
Failed
None
Recommended
action/help
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
Effect on device
PlantWeb Alerts
What the Alert is
detecting
Troubleshooting
PlantWeb
Alert
145
PlantWeb Alerts
Table A-2
Using PlantWeb Alerts (continued)
Default
alert
category
Effect on device
There is a communication
failure between the core
processor and the
transmitter.
Failed
Inoperable.
Verify the wiring between
the transmitter and the
core processor. Cycle
power to the transmitter. If
the problem persists,
contact Micro Motion.
ECP low
power
The enhanced core
processor is not receiving
enough power.
Failed
Inoperable.
Check the power supply to
the transmitter. Check the
wiring between the
transmitter and the core
processor.
Possible data
loss
The core processor was
unable to successfully store
the totalizers on the last
power down.
Maintenance
Potential loss of
information. The core
processor must rely on
the totals that were
previously saved in the
device up to 2 hours
before the power was
lost.
Contact Micro Motion for a
transmitter software
upgrade.
Electronics
failure Hornet
Perform Restart Processor.
If problem persists, call
Micro Motion
Failed
None
NV Memory
Failure
NV memory data check sum
invalid. NV data might be
corrupt.
Failed
Failed
Check function
Check Transducer Block
Mode
Advisory
Advisory
Factory
configuration
checksum invalid
Perform Restart Processor.
If problem persists, call
Micro Motion
Failed
Factory
configuration
invalid
The Factory configuration
data is changed.You can
save the current
configuration as factory
configuration
Advisory
PlantWeb
Alert
What the Alert is
detecting
Core processor/
transmitter
communication
failure
Table A-3
Recommended
action/help
AI / AO block status
Transducer block
mode (Actual)
Active PlantWeb Alerts
AI / AO status
AI / AO substatus
OOS
No effect
Bad
Device failure
Man
No effect
Bad
Non-specific
Auto
Fail
Bad
Non-specific
Auto
Maint., no Fail
Uncertain
Non-specific
Auto
Advisory only
Good
Non-specific
Auto
None
Good
Non-specific
146
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
B.1
Operation
Appendix B
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Overview
The Micro Motion Model 2700 transmitter has seven separate transducer blocks.
B.1.1
Transducer block names
Table B-1
Transducer block tag names, code names, and table numbers
Tag name
Code Name
Parameters
Views
MEASUREMENT TB 1200
Transducer 1200
Table B-2
Table B-3
CALIBRATION TB 1400
Transducer 1400
Table B-4
Table B-5
DIAGNOSTICS TB 1600
Transducer 1600
Table B-6
Table B-7
DEVICE INFORMATION TB 1800
Transducer 1800
Table B-8
Table B-9
LOCAL DISPLAY TB 2000
Transducer 2000
Table B-10
Table B-11
API TB 2200
Transducer 2200
Table B-12
Table B-13
ENHANCED DENSITY TB 2400
Transducer 2400
Table B-14
Table B-15
PlantWeb Alerts
B.2
Troubleshooting
Throughout this manual, the transducer blocks are referred to by their tag (e.g., MEASUREMENT).
Fieldbus hosts that do not support the use of tags as block names will instead show the name
TRANSDUCER followed by a numeric code. Table B-1 shows the relationship between transducer
block tag names and codes, and gives the table number where the parameters and views are described
in this appendix.
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters
Following are the parameters (Table B-2) and views (Table B-3) for the MEASUREMENT transducer
block.
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
147
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access Mode
Default Value
Add to CFF
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Example Value
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-2
Enumerated List
of Values
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the
transducer block
VARIABLE
DS_64(5)
N/A
S
N/A
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
1
ST_REV
The revision level of
the static data
associated with the
function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
0
R
N/A
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of
the intended
application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(32)
N/A
S
YES
Spaces
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
Any 32 Characters
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
YES
0
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
S
YES
0
1
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
1 to 255
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69 (4)
N/A
mix
YES
Auto
1
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
See section 2/6 of
FF-891
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter
reflects the error status
associated with the
hardware or software
components
associated with a
block.
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
See section 4.8 of
FF-903
7
XD_ERROR
Used for all config,
H/W, connection
failure or system
problems in the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
D
-
R
18 = Process
Error
19 = Configuration
Error
20 = Electronics
Failure
21 = Sensor
Failure
0
R
N/A
R/W
(OOS)
1318 = g/s
1319 = g/min
1320 = g/hr
1322 = kg/s
1323 = kg/min
1324 = kg/hr
1325 = kg/day
1327 = t/min
1328 = t/h
1329 = t/d
1330 = lb/s
1331 = lb/min
1332 = lb/hr
1333 = lb/day
1335 = Ston/min
1336 = Ston/hr
1337 = Ston/day
1340 = Lton/hr
1341 = Lton/day
253 = Special
units
“
Process Variables Data
8
MFLOW
Mass Flow Rate
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0247
-0248
D/20
9
MFLOW_UNITS
Standard or special
mass flow rate unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0039
S
148
YES
g/s
1318
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access Mode
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Modbus Register
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Message
Type
10
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI
T_BASE
Base Mass Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-132
S
YES
g
1089
R/W
(OOS)
1089 = Grams
1088 = Kilograms
1092 = Metric
Tons
1094 = Pounds
1095 = Short tons
1096 = long tons
11
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI
T_TIME
Base time unit for
special mass unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-133
S
YES
s
1054
R/W
(OOS)
1058 = Minutes
1054 = Seconds
1059 = Hours
1060 = Days
12
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI
T_CONV
Special mass unit
conversion factor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-237 238
S
YES
1
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
13
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNI
T_STR
Special mass flow unit
string
STRING
VISIBLE
STRING (8)
R-52 55
S
YES
NONE
NONE
R/W
(OOS)
Any 8 characters
14
TEMPERATURE
Temperature
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0251
- 0252
D/20
R
N/A
15
TEMPERATURE_UNITS
Temperature Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0041
S
R/W
(OOS)
1000 = K
1001 = Deg C
1002 = Deg F
1003 = Deg R
16
DENSITY
Density
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0249
- 0250
D/20
R
N/A
17
DENSITY_UNITS
Density Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0040
S
R/W
(OOS)
1097 = kg/m3
1100 = g/cm3
1103 = kg/L
1104 = g/ml
1105 = g/L
1106 = lb/in3
1107 = lb/ft3
1108 = lb/gal
1109 = Ston/yd3
1113 = DegAPI
1114 = SGU
18
VOL_FLOW
Volume flow rate
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0253
-0254
D/20
R
N/A
–
YES
C
1001
–
YES
g/cm3
–
1100
Enumerated List
of Values
PlantWeb Alerts
Definition
Troubleshooting
Parameter Mnemonic
Operation
OD Index
Table B-2
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
149
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access Mode
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-2
Enumerated List
of Values
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
19
VOLUME_FLOW_UNITS
Standard or special
volume flow rate unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R0042
S
YES
l/s
1351
R/W
(OOS)
1347 = m3/s
1348 = m 3/min
1349 = m3/hr
1350 = m3/day
1351 = L/s
1352 = L/min
1353 = L/hr
1355 = Ml/day
1356 = CFS
1357 = CFM
1358 = CFH
1359 = ft3/day /
Standard cubic
ft. per day
1362 = gal/s
1363 = GPM
1364 = gal/hour
1365 = gal/day
1366 = Mgal/day
1367 = ImpGal/s
1368 =
ImpGal/min
1369 = ImpGal/hr
1370 = Impgal/day
1371 = bbl/s
1372 = bbl/min
1373 = bbl/hr
1374 = bbl/day
1631 = barrel (US
Beer) per
day
1632 = barrel (US
Beer) per
hour
1633 = barrel (US
Beer) per
minute
1634 =barrel (US
Beer) per
Second
253 = Special
units
20
VOL_SPECIAL_UNIT_B
ASE
Base Volume Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R -133
S
YES
1
1038
R/W
(OOS)
1048 = Gallons
1038 = Liters
1049 = Imperial
Gallons
1043 = Cubic Feet
1034 = Cubic
Meters
1051 = Barrels
21
VOL
_SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME
Base time unit for
special volume unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R - 134
S
YES
s
1054
R/W
(OOS)
1058 = Minutes
1054 = Seconds
1059 = Hours
1060 = Days
22
VOL
_SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV
Special volume unit
conversion factor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R - 239
- 240
S
YES
1
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
23
VOL
_SPECIAL_UNIT_STR
Special volume unit
string
STRING
VISIBLE
STRING (8)
R - 60 63
S
YES
NONE
NONE
R/W
(OOS)
Any 8 characters
24
MASS_TOT_INV_SPECI
AL_ STR
Special mass total and
inventory unit string
STRING
VISIBLE
STRING(8)
R -56 59
S
YES
NONE
NONE
R/W
(OOS)
Any 4 characters
25
VOLUME_TOT_INV_
SPECIAL_ STR
Special volume total
and inventory unit
string
STRING
VISIBLE
STRING (8)
R -64 67
S
YES
NONE
NONE
R/W
(OOS)
Any 4 characters
26
FLOW_DAMPING
Flow rate (Mass and
Volume) internal
damping (seconds)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-189
-190
S
YES
0.8
0.8
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
27
TEMPERATURE_DAMPI
NG
Temperature internal
damping (seconds)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-191
-192
S
YES
4.8
4.8
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
28
DENSITY_DAMPING
Density internal
damping (seconds)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R 193
-194
S
YES
1.6
1.6
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
29
MFLOW_M_FACTOR
Mass Rate Factor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-2790280
S
YES
1.0
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
150
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access Mode
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
30
DENSITY_M_FACTOR
Density Factor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-283
-284
S
YES
1.0
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
31
VOL_M_FACTOR
Volume Rate Factor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-281282
S
YES
1.0
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
32
MASS_LOW_CUT
Mass flow cutoff for
internal totalizers
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-195 196
S
YES
0.0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
33
VOLUME_FLOW_LOW_
CUTOFF
Volume flow cutoff for
internal totalizers
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-197198
S
YES
0.0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
34
DENSITY_LOW_CUTOF
F
Density cutoff for
internal totalizers
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-149150
S
YES
0.2
0.2
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
35
FLOW_DIRECTION
Flow direction
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0017
S
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = Forward Only
1 = Reverse Only
2 = Bi-Directional
3 = Absolute Value
4=
Negate/Forward
Only
5 = Negate/Bi-Dir
36
HIGH_MASS_LIMIT
High mass flow limit of
sensor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-165166
S
Calc
R
N/A
37
HIGH_TEMP_LIMIT
High Temperature limit
of sensor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-167168
S
Calc
R
N/A
38
HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT
High density limit of
sensor (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-169170
S
Calc
R
N/A
39
HIGH_VOLUME_LIMIT
High volume flow limit
of sensor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-171172
S
Calc
R
N/A
40
LOW_MASS_LIMIT
Low mass flow limit of
sensor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-173174
S
Calc
R
N/A
41
LOW_TEMP_LIMIT
Low Temperature limit
of sensor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-175176
S
Calc
R
N/A
42
LOW_DENSITY_LIMIT
Low density limit of
sensor (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-177178
S
Calc
R
N/A
43
LOW_VOLUME_LIMIT
Low volume flow limit
of sensor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-179180
S
Calc
R
N/A
Enumerated List
of Values
Totalizers
INTEGRATOR_FB_CON
FIG
Configuration of
Integrator Function
Block
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-1511
S
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = Standard
1 = Internal Mass
Total
2 = Internal Vol
Total
3 = Internal Mass
Inv.
4 = Internal Vol
Inv.
5 = Int Gas Vol Tot
6 = Int Gas Vol Inv
7 = Int API Vol Tot
8 = Int API Vol Inv
9 = Int ED Std Vol
Tot
10= Int ED Std Vol
Inv
11= Int ED Net
Mass Tot
12= Int ED Net
Mass Inv
13= Int ED Net Vol
Tot
14= Int ED Net Vol
Inv
45
START_STOP_TOTALS
Start/Stop all
Totalizers
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C-2
-
YES
1
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of
DS-66
0 = Stop Totals
1 = Start Totals
46
RESET_TOTALS
Reset all Totals
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C-3
-
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of
DS-66
1 = Reset
Configuration and Use Manual
151
TB Reference
44
PlantWeb Alerts
Definition
Troubleshooting
Parameter Mnemonic
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Operation
Modbus Register
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
OD Index
Table B-2
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access Mode
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-2
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
Message
Type
Enumerated List
of Values
47
RESET_INVENTORIES
Reset all Inventories
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C-4
-
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
1 = Reset
48
RESET_MASS_TOTAL
Reset Mass Total
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C - 56
-
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of
DS-66
1 = Reset
49
RESET_VOLUME_TOTA
L
Reset Volume Total
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C - 57
-
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of
DS-66
1 = Reset
50
MASS_TOTAL
Mass Total
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0259
-0260
D/20
–
R
N/A
51
VOLUME_TOTAL
Volume Total
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0261
-0262
D/20
–
R
N/A
52
MASS_INVENTORY
Mass Inventory
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0263
-0264
D/20
–
R
N/A
53
VOLUME_INVENTORY
Volume Inventory
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0265
-0266
D/20
–
R
N/A
54
MASS_TOT_INV_UNITS
Standard or special
mass total and mass
inventory unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0045
S
g
R
1088 = Kg
1089 = g
1092 = metric tons
1094 = lbs
1095 = short tons
1096 = long tons
253 = Special
units
55
VOLUME_TOT_INV_UNI
TS
Standard or special
volume total or mass
inventory unit.
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0046
S
1l
R
1034 = m3
1036 = cm3
1038 = l
1043 = ft3
1048 = gal
1049 = ImpGal
1051 = bbl
253 = Special
units.
56
GSV_Gas_Dens
Gas Density used to
calculate Reference
Volume Gas Flow and
Totals
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0453
-0454
S
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
57
GSV_Vol_Flow
Reference Volume
Gas Flow Rate (not
valid when API or CM
is enabled)
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0455
-0456
D/20
–
R
N/A
58
GSV_Vol_Tot
Reference Volume
Gas Total (not valid
when API or CM is
enabled)
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0457
-0458
D/20
–
R
N/A
59
GSV_Vol_Inv
Reference Volume
Gas Inventory (not
valid when API or CM
is enabled)
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0459
-0460
D/20
–
R
N/A
60
SNS_EnableGSV
Enable/Disable Gas
Standard Volume Flow
and Totals
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-78
S
R/W
(OOS)
0 = disabled (liquid)
1 = enabled (gas)
Gas Process Variables
152
YES
YES
0.00120
5
0
0.0012
05
0
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Unsigned16
(2)
R-2601
S
62
SNS_GSV_TotalUnits
Gas Standard Volume
Total and Inventory
Engineering Units
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-2602
S
63
SNS_GSVflowBaseUnit
Base Gas Standard
Volume Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-2603
S
64
SNS_GSVflowBaseTime
Base time unit for special gas standard volume unit.
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-2604
65
SNS_GSVflowFactor
Special gas standard
volume unit conversion
factor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
66
SNS_GSVflowText
Special gas standard
volume unit string
STRING
67
SNS_GSVtotText
Special gas standard
volume total and
inventory unit string
68
SNS_GSV_FlowCutoff
69
70
R/W
(OOS)
1356 = SCFS
1359 = SCFD
1360 = SCFM
1361 = SCFH
1522 = Nm3/s
1523 = Nm3/m
1524 = Nm3/h
1525 = Nm3/d
1527 = Sm3/s
1528 = Sm3/m
1529 = Sm3/h
1530 = Sm3/d
1532 = NL/s
1533 = NL/m
1534 = NL/h
1535 = NL/d
1537 = SL/s
1538 = SL/m
1539 = SL/h
1540 = SL/d
253 = Special
units.
SCF
R
1053 = SCF
1521 = Nm3
1526 = Sm3
1531 = NL
1536 = SL
253 = Special
units
YES
SCF
R/W
(OOS)
1521 = Normal
cubic meter
1531 = Normal
liter
1053 = Standard
cubic ft
1536 = Standard
liter
1526 = Standard
cu meter
S
YES
min
1058
R/W
(OOS)
1058 = Minutes
1054 = Seconds
1059 = Hours
1060 = Days
R-2605
- 2606
S
YES
1
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
VISIBLE
STRING (8)
R-2607
- 2610
S
YES
NONE
NONE
R/W
(OOS)
Any 8 characters
STRING
VISIBLE
STRING (8)
R-2611
- 2614
S
YES
NONE
NONE
R/W
(OOS)
Any 4 characters
Gas Standard Volume
Low Flow Cutoff
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-461462
S
YES
-
0
R/W
(OOS)
Must be >=0.0
SNS_ResetGSVolTotal
Reset Gas Standard
Volume Total
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C-63
SS
YES
–
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of
DS-66
1 = Reset
SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv
Reset Gas Standard
Volume Inventory
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-194
S
YES
–
0
R/W
(Any)
1 = Reset
Configuration and Use Manual
YES
SCFM
1360
Access Mode
ENUM
Example Value
Gas Standard Volume
Flow Engineering
Units
Default Value
SNS_GSV_FlowUnits
153
TB Reference
61
Enumerated List
of Values
PlantWeb Alerts
Definition
Troubleshooting
Parameter Mnemonic
Add to CFF
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Modbus Register
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Operation
OD Index
Table B-2
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access Mode
Default Value
Message
Type
Add to CFF
Definition
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-2
Enumerated List
of Values
Other 4.0 additions
71
SNS_ResetMassInventory
Reset Mass Inventory
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-192
S
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
1 = Reset
72
SNS_ResetVolumeInventory
Reset Volume Inventory
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-193
S
YES
0
0
R/W
(Any)
1 = Reset
Indicates whether flow
is moving in the forward or reverse direction
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
R422/B
it #4
-
R
Value part of
DS-66
0 = Forward or
Zero Flow
1 = Reverse Flow
v7.0 Additions
73
SNS_ActualFlowDirection
Table B-3
OD
Index
0
MEASUREMENT transducer block views
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
2
2
2
2
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
4
ALERT_KEY
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
7
XD_ERROR
1
1
2
1
Process Variables Data
154
8
MFLOW
9
MFLOW_UNITS
5
5
2
10
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_BASE
2
11
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME
2
12
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV
4
13
MFLOW_SPECIAL_UNIT_STR
14
TEMPERATURE
15
TEMPERATURE_UNITS
16
DENSITY
17
DENSITY_UNITS
8
5
5
2
5
5
2
18
VOL_FLOW
19
VOL_FLOW_UNITS
5
5
20
VOL_SPECIAL_UNIT_BASE
2
21
VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_TIME
2
22
VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_CONV
4
23
VOL _SPECIAL_UNIT_STR
8
24
MASS_TOT_INV_SPECIAL_ STR
8
25
VOLUME_TOT_INV_ SPECIAL_ STR
8
26
FLOW_DAMPING
2
4
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-3
MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)
Parameter Mnemonic
27
TEMPERATURE_DAMPING
4
28
DENSITY_DAMPING
4
29
MFLOW_M_FACTOR
4
30
DENSITY_M_FACTOR
4
31
VOL_M_FACTOR
4
32
MASS_LOW_CUT
4
33
VOLUME_LOW_CUT
4
34
DENSITY_LOW_CUT
4
35
FLOW_DIRECTION
2
View 1
View 2
HIGH_MASS_LIMIT
4
37
HIGH_TEMP_LIMIT
4
38
HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT
4
39
HIGH_VOLUME_LIMIT
4
40
LOW_MASS_LIMIT
4
41
LOW_TEMP_LIMIT
4
42
LOW_DENSITY_LIMIT
4
43
LOW_VOLUME_LIMIT
4
44
INTEGRATOR_FB_CONFIG
2
45
START_STOP_TOTALS
2
View 4
Troubleshooting
36
View 3
Operation
OD
Index
Totalizers
46
RESET_TOTALS
2
47
RESET_INVENTORIES
2
48
RESET_MASS_TOTAL
2
49
RESET_VOLUME_TOTAL
50
MASS_TOTAL
51
VOLUME_TOTAL
5
5
52
MASS_INVENTORY
5
5
53
VOLUME_INVENTORY
5
5
2
5
5
MASS_TOT_INV_UNITS
2
55
VOLUME_TOT_INV_UNITS
2
PlantWeb Alerts
54
Gas Process Variables
GSV_Gas_Dens
57
GSV_Vol_Flow
5
5
58
GSV_Vol_Tot
5
5
59
GSV_Vol_Inv
5
5
60
SNS_EnableGSV
2
61
SNS_GSV_FlowUnits
2
62
SNS_GSV_TotalUnits
2
63
SNS_GSVflowBaseUnit
2
64
SNS_GSVflowBaseTime
2
65
SNS_GSVflowFactor
4
66
SNS_GSVflowText
8
67
SNS_GSVtotText
8
68
SNS_GSV_FlowCutoff
2
69
SNS_ResetGSVolTotal
2
70
SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv
2
71
SNS_ResetMassInventory
2
Configuration and Use Manual
4
TB Reference
56
155
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-3
MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
72
SNS_ResetVolumeInventory
73
SNS_ActualFlowDirection
View 1
View 3
View 4
64
85
2
2
Totals
B.3
View 2
64
110
CALIBRATION transducer block parameters
Following are the parameters (Table B-4) and views (Table B-5) for the CALIBRATION transducer
block.
Access
Default Value
Add to CFF
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Example Value
CALIBRATION transducer block parameters
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-4
Enumerated List
of Values
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the
transducer block
VARIABLE
DS_64 (5)
N/A
S
N/A
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
1
ST_REV
The revision level of
the static data
associated with the
function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
0
R
N/A
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of
the intended
application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(32)
N/A
S
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
Any 32 Characters
Yes
Spaces
“
“
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
S
Yes
0
1
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
1 to 255
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69 (4)
N/A
mix
Yes
Auto
11
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
See section 2/6 of
FF-891
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter
reflects the error status
associated with the
hardware or software
components
associated with a
block.
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
See section 4.8 of
FF-903
7
XD_ERROR
Used for all config,
H/W, connection
failure or system
problems in the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
D
-
R
18 = Process
Error
19 = Configuration
Error
20 = Electronics
Failure
21 = Sensor
Failure
Flow calibration factor
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-407
– 408
S
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
Calibration
8
MASS_FLOW_GAIN
156
Yes
1.0
1.0
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Modbus Register
CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-409410
S
Yes
5.13
5.12
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
ZERO_CAL
Perform auto zero
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C-0005
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
Value part of
DS-66
0 = Abort Zero Cal
1 = Start Zero Cal
11
ZERO_TIME
Maximum zeroing time
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0136
S
Yes
20
20
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
12
ZERO_STD_DEV
Standard deviation of
auto zero
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0231
-232
S
0
R
N/A
13
ZERO_OFFSET
Present flow signal offset
at zero flow in sec
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-233234
S
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
14
ZERO_FAILED_VAULE
Value of the zero if the
zero cal failed
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0235
-0236
S
0
R
N/A
15
LOW_DENSITY_CAL
Perform low density
calibration
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0013
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0 = None
1 = Start Cal
16
HIGH_DENSITY_CAL
Perform high-density
calibration
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0014
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0x0000 = None
0x0001 = Start
Cal
17
FLOWING_DENSITY_C
AL
Perform
flowing-density
calibration
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0018
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(any)
0 = None
1 = Start Cal
18
D3_DENSITY_CAL
Perform third point
calibration
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0044
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0 = None
1 = Start Cal
19
D4_DENSITY_CAL
Perform fourth point
calibration
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0045
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0x0000 = None
0x0001 = Start
Cal
20
K1
Density calibration
constant 1 (msec)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-159160
S
Yes
1000
7000.
00
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
21
K2
Density calibration
constant 2 (msec)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-161162
S
Yes
50000
1100
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
22
FD
Flowing Density
calibration constant
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R303-3
04
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
23
K3
Density calibration
constant 3 (sec)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0503
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
24
K4
Density calibration
constant 4 (sec)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0519
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
25
D1
Density 1 (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0155
-0156
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
26
D2
Density 2 (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0157
-0158
S
Yes
1
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
27
FD_VALUE
Flowing Density (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R277-2
78
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
N/A
28
D3
Density 3 (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
29
D4
Density 4 (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-511
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
30
DENS_T_COEFF
Density temperature
coefficient
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0163
-164
S
Yes
4.44
4.44
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
31
T_FLOW_TG_COEFF
T-Series: Flow TG
Coefficient (FTG)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-505
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
32
T_FLOW_FQ_COEFF
T-Series: Flow FQ
Coefficient (FFQ)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-507
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
33
T_DENSITY_TG_COEFF
T-Series: Density TG
Coefficient (DTG)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-513
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
34
T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF
1
T-Series: Density FQ
Coefficient #1 (DFQ1)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-515
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
35
T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF
2
T-Series: Density FQ
Coefficient #2 (DFQ2)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-517
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
Definition
9
MASS_FLOW_T_COMP
10
Enumerated List
of Values
PlantWeb Alerts
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
Access
Temperature
coefficient for flow
Parameter Mnemonic
Troubleshooting
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Operation
OD Index
Table B-4
157
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-4
Enumerated List
of Values
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
36
TEMP_LOW_CAL
Perform temperature
calibration at the low
point (point 1)
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C-15
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0 = None
1 = Start Cal
37
TEMP_HIGH_CAL
Perform temperature
calibration at the high
point 2)
METHOD
Unsigned16
(2)
C - 16
-
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0 = None
1 = Start Cal
38
TEMP_VALUE
Temperature Value for
temp calibrations (in
degC)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R151-15
2
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
39
TEMP_OFFSET
Temperature
calibration offset
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0413
-414
S
Yes
0.0
0
R /W
(OOS)
N/A
40
TEMP_SLOPE
Temperature
calibration slope
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0411
-0412
S
Yes
0
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
41
PRESSURE
Pressure
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0451
-452
D/20
R/W
(any)
N/A
42
PRESSURE_UNITS
Pressure Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0044
S
Yes
psi
1141
R/W
(OOS)
1148 = inch water
@ 68F / inch
water@60F
1156 = inch HG @
0C
1154 = ft water @
68F
1151 = mm water
@ 68F
1158 = mm HG @
0C
1141 = psi
1137 = bar
1138 = millibar
1144 = g/cm2
1145 = kg/cm2
1130 = pascals
1132 = Mega
pascals
1133 = kilopascals
1139 = torr @ 0C
1140 =
atmospheres
1147 = Inches
water @
4 degrees
Celsius
1150 = Millimeters
water @ 4
degrees
Celsius
43
EN_PRESSURE_COMP
Enable/Disable
Pressure
Compensation
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0082
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0= disabled
1 = enabled
44
PRESSURE_FACTOR_
FLOW
Pressure correction
factor for flow
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-267268
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
45
PRESSURE_FACTOR_
DENS
Pressure correction
factor for density
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-269270
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
46
PRESSURE_FLOW_CA
L
Flow calibration
pressure
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-271272
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(OOS)
N/A
47
SNS_EnableExtTemp
Enable/Disable
Temperature
Compensation
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0086
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0= disabled
1 = enabled
Pressure Compensation
0
Temperature Compensation
158
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
External Temperature
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
49
SNS_ZeroInProgress
Indicates whether a
zero calibration,
density calibration or
temperature
calibration is running.
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R421/B
it #14
Access
SNS_ExternalTempInput
Example Value
48
Default Value
Message
Type
Add to CFF
Definition
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Modbus Register
CALIBRATION transducer block parameters (continued)
-
0
R/W
(Any)
S
0
R
Enumerated List
of Values
Operation
OD Index
Table B-4
v7.0 Additions
Table B-5
CALIBRATION transducer block views
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
2
2
2
2
Troubleshooting
OD
Index
Value part of
DS-66
0 = Not Running
1 = Calibration
Running
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
4
ALERT_KEY
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
7
XD_ERROR
1
1
2
1
Calibration
MASS_FLOW_GAIN
4
9
MASS_FLOW_T_COMP
4
10
ZERO_CAL
2
11
ZERO_TIME
2
12
ZERO_STD_DEV
4
13
ZERO_OFFSET
4
14
ZERO_FAILED_VAULE
15
LOW_DENSITY_CAL
2
16
HIGH_DENSITY_CAL
2
17
FLOWING_DENSITY_CAL
2
18
D3_DENSITY_CAL
2
4
D4_DENSITY_CAL
2
20
K1
4
21
K2
4
22
FD
4
23
K3
4
24
K4
4
25
D1
4
26
D2
4
27
FD_VALUE
4
28
D3
4
29
D4
4
TB Reference
19
Configuration and Use Manual
PlantWeb Alerts
8
159
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-5
CALIBRATION transducer block views (continued)
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
30
DENS_T_COEFF
4
31
T_FLOW_TG_COEFF
4
32
T_FLOW_FQ_COEFF
4
33
T_DENSITY_TG_COEFF
4
34
T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF1
4
35
T_DENSITY_FQ_COEFF2
4
36
TEMP_LOW_CAL
2
37
TEMP_HIGH_CAL
2
38
TEMP_VALUE
4
39
TEMP_OFFSET
4
40
TEMP_SLOPE
4
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
Pressure Compensation
41
PRESSURE
42
PRESSURE_UNITS
5
5
2
43
EN_PRESSURE_COMP
2
44
PRESSURE_FACTOR_FLOW
4
45
PRESSURE_FACTOR_DENS
4
46
PRESSURE_FLOW_CAL
4
Temperature Compensation
47
SNS_EnableExtTemp
48
SNS_ExternalTempInput
2
5
v7.0 Additions
49
SNS_ZeroInProgress
2
Totals
34
19
Access
Message
Type
Default Value
Definition
Add to CFF
Parameter Mnemonic
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters
Store/Rate (HZ)
Table B-6
OD Index
102
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters
Modbus Register
B.4
19
Enumerated List
of Values
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the
transducer block
VARIABLE
DS_64 (5)
N/A
S
N/A
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
1
ST_REV
The revision level of
the static data
associated with the
function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
0
R
N/A
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of
the intended
application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(32)
N/A
S
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
Any 32 Characters
160
Yes
Spaces
"
"
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Modbus Register
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List
of Values
Definition
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8(
1)
N/A
S
Yes
0
1
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
1 to 255
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69 (4)
N/A
mix
Yes
Auto
01
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
See section 2/6 of
FF-891
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter
reflects the error status
associated with the
hardware or software
components
associated with a
block.
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
See section 4.8 of
FF-903
7
XD_ERROR
Used for all config,
H/W, connection
failure or system
problems in the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8(
1)
N/A
D
-
R
18 = Process
Error
19 = Configuration
Error
20 = Electronics
Failure
21 = Sensor
Failure
Troubleshooting
Parameter Mnemonic
Operation
OD Index
Table B-6
Slug Flow Setup
Slug duration
(seconds)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0141142
S
Yes
0.0
0.0
R/W
(Any)
N/A
9
SLUG_LOW_LIMIT
Low Density limit
(g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-201-2
02
S
Yes
0.0
0.0
R/W
(Any)
N/A
10
SLUG_HIGH_LIMIT
High Density limit
(g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-199-2
00
S
Yes
5.0
5.0
R/W
(Any)
N/A
Status Word 1
ENUM
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
R
0x0001 =
Transmitter Fail
0x0002 = Sensor
Fail
0x0004 =
EEPROM error
(CP)
0x0008 = RAM
error (CP)
0x0010= Boot Fail
(CP)
0x0020 = Uncofig
– FloCal
0x0040 = Uncofig
– K1
0x0080 = Input
Overrange
0x0100 = Temp.
Overrange
0x0200 = Dens.
Overrange
0x0400 = RTI
Failure
0x0800 = Cal
Failed
0x1000= Xmitter
Init
0x2000 =
Sns/Xmitter comm
fault
0x4000 = Other
Failure
0x8000 = Xmitter
Not Characterized
Alarm Status
11
ALARM1_STATUS
Configuration and Use Manual
-
161
TB Reference
SLUG_TIME
PlantWeb Alerts
8
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-6
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
Message
Type
12
ALARM2_STATUS
Status Word 2
ENUM
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
0x0001 = Line
RTD Over
0x0002 = Meter
RTD Over
0x0004 = CP
Exception
0x0008 = API:
Temp OOL
0x0010=
API:Density OOL
0x0020 = ED:
Unable to fit curve
data
0x0040 = ED:
Extrapolation
alarm
0x0080 = Not
Used
0x0100 =
EEPROM err
(2700)
0x0200 = RAM err
(2700)
0x0400 = Factory
Config err
0x0800 = Low
Power
0x1000= Tube not
full
0x2000 = Meter
Verify fault
0x4000 = Not
Used
0x8000 = Not
Used
13
ALARM3_STATUS
Status Word 3
ENUM
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
0x0001 = Drive
Overrange
0x0002 = Slug
Flow
0x0004 = Cal in
Progress
0x0008 = Data
Loss Possible
0x0010 = Upgrade
Series 2000
0x0020 =
Simulation Mode
0x0040 = Meter
Verify warn
0x0080 =
Warming Up
0x0100 = Power
Reset
0x0200 = Reverse
Flow
0x0400 = AI/AO
Simulation Active
0x0800 = Not
Used
0x1000= Not
Used
0x2000 = Not
Used
0x4000 = Not
Used
0x8000 = Not
Used
162
Enumerated List
of Values
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
14
ENUM
BIT
STRING (2)
D/20
-
Access
Status Word 4
Example Value
ALARM4_STATUS
Default Value
Message
Type
Add to CFF
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Modbus Register
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
R
Enumerated List
of Values
invalid
0x1000= 1 Factory
configuration
data
checksum invalid
0x2000 = Core
EEPROM DB
corrupt
0x4000 = Core
EEPROM Totals
corrupt
0x8000 = Core
EEPROM
Program corrupt
FAULT_LIMIT
Fault Limit Code
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-124
S
16
LAST_MEASURED_VALUE
_FAULT_TIMEOUT
Last Measured Value
Fault Timeout
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
R-314
S
5
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0 = Upscale
1 = Downscale
2 = Zero
3 = NAN
4 = Flow goes to
zero
5 = None
R/W
(Any)
N/A
PlantWeb Alerts
15
Troubleshooting
0x0001 = Cal Fail:
Low
0x0002 = Cal Fail:
High
0x0004 = Cal Fail:
Noisy
0x0008 = Auto
Zero IP
0x0010= D1 IP
0x0020 = D2 IP
0x0040 = FD IP
0x0080 = Temp
slope IP
0x0100 = Temp
offset IP
0x0200 = D3 IP
0x0400 = D4 IP
0x0800 = 1 Factory
configuration
Operation
OD Index
Table B-6
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
163
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
17
Alarm Index
ENUM
164
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
1
Access
ALARM_INDEX
Default Value
Message
Type
Add to CFF
Definition
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-6
R/W
(Any)
Enumerated List
of Values
0 = N/A
1 = EEPROM
Error (CP)
2 = RAM Error
(CP)
3 = Sensor Fail
4 = Temp.
Overrange
5 = Input
Overrange
6 = Xmitter Not
Characterized
7 = N/A
8 = Dens.
Overrange
9 = Xmitter Init
10 = Cal Failed
11 = Cal Failed:
Low
12 = Cal Failed:
High
13 = Cal Failed:
Noisy
14 = Transmitter
Failed
15 = N/A
16 = Line RTD
Over
17 = Meter RTD
Over
18 = EEPROM
Checksum Error
19 = RAM Error
20 = Unconfig K1
21 = Incorrect
Sensor
22 = Core
EEPROM DB
Corrupt
23 = Core
EEPROM Totals
Corrupt
24 = Core
EEPROM
Promram Corrupt
25 = Boot Failed
(CP)
26 = Sns/Xmitter
comm error
27 = N/A
28 = CP
Exception
29-30 = N/A
31 = Low Power
32 = Meter
Verification in
Progress
33 = Tube Stoped
in process
34 = Meter
Verification Failed
35 = Meter
Verification
Aborted
36-41 = N/A
42 = Drive
Overrange
43 = Data Loss
Possible
44 = Cal in
Progress
45 = Slug Flow
46 = N/A
47 = Power Reset
48-55 = N/A
60 = ED: Unable
to fit curve data
56 = API: Temp
OOL
57 = API:Density
OOL
58-59 = N/A
72 = Simulation
Mode
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Message
Type
Add to CFF
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Modbus Register
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List
of Values
Operation
OD Index
Table B-6
61 = ED:
Extrapolation
Alarm
62-67 = N/A
68 = Factory
Config Invalid
69 = Factory
Config Checksum
Invalid
70 = N/A
71 = Meter
Verification In
progress
18
ALARM_SEVERITY
Alarm Severity
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-1238
with
R-1237
= OD
17
S
19
DRIVE_GAIN
Drive Gain
VARIABLE
DS-65 (50)
R-291-2
92
D/20
20
TUBE_FREQUENCY
Raw Tube Period
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-285-2
86
21
LIVE_ZERO
Live Zero (Mass Flow)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
22
LEFT_PICKUP_VOLTAGE
Left Pickoff Voltage
VARIABLE
23
RIGHT_PICKUP_VOLTAGE
Right Pickoff Voltage
24
BOARD_TEMPERATURE
25
Yes
0
2
0 = Ignore
1 = Info
2 = Fault
–
R
N/A
D/20
–
R
N/A
R-293-2
94
D/20
–
R
N/A
FLOAT (4)
R-287-2
8
D/20
–
R
N/A
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-289-2
90
D/20
–
R
N/A
Board Temperature
(degC)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-383-3
84
D/20
–
R
N/A
ELECT_TEMP_MAX
Maximum electronics
temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-463
D/20
–
R
N/A
26
ELECT_TEMP_MIN
Minimum electronics
temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-465
D/20
–
R
N/A
27
ELECT_TEMP_AVG
Average electronics
temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-467
D/20
–
R
N/A
28
SENSOR_TEMP_MAX
Maximum sensor
temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-435-4
36
D/20
–
R
N/A
29
SENSOR_TEMP_MIN
Minimum sensor
temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-437-4
38
D/20
–
R
N/A
30
SENSOR_TEMP_AVG
Average sensor
temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-439-4
40
D/20
–
R
N/A
31
RTD_RESISTANCE_CABLE
9-wire cable RTD
Resistance (ohms)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-469
D/20
–
R
N/A
32
RTD_RESISTANCE_
METER
Meter RTD Resistance
(ohms)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-475
D/20
–
R
N/A
33
CP_POWER_CYCLE
Number of core
processor power
cycles
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-497
D
–
R
N/A
34
MFP_SAVE_FACTORY
Save Factory Cal
Meter Fingerprint
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C - 39
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0x0000 = no
action
0x0001 = save
35
MFP_RESET_STATS
Reset Meter Current
Fingerprint Statistics
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C - 40
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0x0000 = no
action
0x0001 = reset
36
EN_MFP
Enable/Disable Meter
Fingerprinting
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C - 74
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(Any)
0x0000 = disabled
0x0001 = enabled
37
MFP_UNITS
Meter Fingerprint in SI
(0) or English (1) units
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R - 625
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0x0000 = SI
0x0001 = English
Troubleshooting
R/W
(OOS)
Diagnostics
PlantWeb Alerts
Meter Fingerprinting
165
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-6
Enumerated List
of Values
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
38
MFP_TV_INDEX
Meter Fingerprint
Transmitter Variable
Index
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = Mass Flow
Rate
1 = Temperature
3 = Density
5 = Volume Flow
Rate
46 = Raw Tube
Frequency
47 = Drive Gain
48 = Case
Temperature
49 = LPO
Amplitude
50 = RPO
Amplitude
51 = Board
Temperature
52 = Input Voltage
54 = Live Zero
39
MFP_TYPE
Fingerprint Type
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = Current
1 = Factory Cal
2 = Installation
3 = Last Zero
40
MFP_TV_INST
Transmitter Variable,
Instantaneous (only
valid for Current print)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-629-6
30
D
–
R
41
MFP_TV_AVG
Transmitter Variable,
Average (1-min rolling)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-631-6
32
D
–
R
42
MFP_TV_STD_DEV
Transmitter Variable,
Std Dev (1-min rolling)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-633-6
34
D
–
R
43
MFP_TV_MAX
Transmitter Variable,
Maximum (since last
statistics reset)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-635-6
36
D
–
R
44
MFP_TV_MIN
Transmitter Variable,
Minimum (since last
statistics reset)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-637-6
38
D
–
R
45
DIAG_FEATURE_KEY
Enabled Features
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
R-5000
S
–
R
0x0000 =
standard
0x0010 = Meter
Verify.
0x0080 = PID
0x0800 = Enh.
Density
0x1000 = API
46
SYS_PowerOnTimeSec
Power on time
(Seconds since last
reset)
VARIABLE
R-26252626
D
–
R
N/A
v4.0 Additions
UnsignedI3
2 (4)
47
SNS_InputVoltage
Input Voltage (Volts)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-385-3
86
D
–
R
N/A
48
SNS_TargetAmplitude
Actual Target
Amplitude (mV/Hz)
(Pre 700 2.1, Actual &
Override)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-395-3
96
D
–
R
N/A
49
SNS_CaseRTDRes
Case RTD Resistance
(ohms)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-473-4
74
D
–
R
N/A
50
SYS_RestoreFactoryConfig
Restore Factory
Configuration
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0247
S
Yes
0
R/W
(OOS)
0x0000 = no
action
0x0001 = Restore
51
SNS_FlowZeroRestore
Restore Factory Zero
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-243
S
Yes
0
R/W
(OOS)
0x0000 = no
action
0x0001 = Restore
52
SNS_AutoZeroFactory
Factory flow signal
offset at zero flow
(units of Sec)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
2673-26
74
S
–
R
N/A
166
0
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Modbus Register
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
53
SYS_ResetPowerOnTime
Reset power-on time
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-242
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0x0000 = no
action
0x0001 = Reset
54
FRF_EnableFCFValidation
Start/Stop Meter
Verification
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
R-3000
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0 = Disabled
1 = Full Meter
Verification
(including current
calibrations)
2 =Factory Air
Verification
3 =Factory Water
Verification
4 =Special debug
mode
5 =Abort
6 =Background
Meter Verification
(no current cal)
7 = Single Point
Baseline (takes
the place of
factory air and
factory water)
55
FRF_FaultAlarm
The state of the
outputs when the
meter verification
routine is running.
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-3093
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0=Last Value
56
FRF_StiffnessLimit
The setpoint of the
stiffness limit.
Represents
percentage.
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3147-31
48
S
Yes
0
0.04
R/W
(Any)
57
FRF_AlgoState
The current state of
the meter verification
routine.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-3001
S
–
R
1 through 18
58
FRF_AbortCode
The reason the meter
verification routine
aborted.
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-3002
S
–
R
0=No error
1=Manual Abort
2=Watchdog
Timeout
3=Frequency Drift
4=High Peak
Drive Voltage
5=High Drive
Current Standard
Deviation
6=High Drive
Current Mean
Value
7=Drive loop
reported error
8=High Delta T
Standard
Deviation
9=High Delta T
Value
10=State Running
59
FRF_StateAtAbort
The state of the meter
verification routine
when it aborted.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-3003
S
–
R
1 through 18
60
FRF_Progress
Progress (%
Complete)
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-3020
S
–
R
N/A
61
FRF_StiffOutLimLpo
Is the LPO Stiffness
out of limits?
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R3004
S
–
R
N/A
62
FRF_StiffOutLimRpo
Is the RPO Stiffness
out of limits?
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R3005
S
–
R
N/A
Configuration and Use Manual
Enumerated List
of Values
TB Reference
Message
Type
PlantWeb Alerts
Definition
Troubleshooting
Parameter Mnemonic
Operation
OD Index
Table B-6
167
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Example Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Default Value
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-6
The current LPO
stiffness calculated as
a mean
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3101 –
3102
with
3100=0
S
–
R
N/A
FRF_StiffnessRpo_mean
The current RPO
stiffness calculated as
a mean
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3103-31
04 with
3100=0
S
–
R
N/A
65
FRF_Damping_meanR –
3109-3110 with 3100=0
The current damping
calculated as a mean
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3105-31
06 with
3100=0
S
–
R
N/A
66
FRF_MassLpo_mean
The current LPO mass
calculated as a mean
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3107-31
08 with
3100=0
S
–
R
N/A
67
FRF_MassRpo_mean
The current RPO mass
calculated as a mean
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3109-31
10 with
3100=0
S
–
R
N/A
68
FRF_StiffnessLpo_stddev
The current LPO
stiffness calculated as
a standard deviation
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3101 –
3102
with
3100=1
S
–
R
N/A
69
FRF_StiffnessRpo_stddev
The current RPO
stiffness calculated as
a standard deviation
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3103-31
04 with
3100=1
S
–
R
N/A
70
FRF_Damping_stddev
The current damping
calculated as a
standard deviation
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3105-31
06 with
3100=1
S
–
R
N/A
71
FRF_MassLpo_stddev
The current LPO mass
calculated as a
standard deviation
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3107-31
08 with
3100=1
S
–
R
N/A
72
FRF_MassRpo_stddev
The current RPO mass
calculated as a
standard deviation
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3109-31
10 with
3100=1
S
–
R
N/A
73
FRF_StiffnessLpo_air
The LPO stiffness
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Air
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3101 –
3102
with
3100=2
S
–
R
N/A
74
FRF_StiffnessRpo_air
The RPO stiffness
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Air
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3103-31
04 with
3100=2
S
–
R
N/A
75
FRF_Damping_air
The damping
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Air
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3105-31
06 with
3100=2
S
–
R
N/A
76
FRF_MassLpo_air
The LPO mass
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Air
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3107-31
08 with
3100=2
S
–
R
N/A
77
FRF_MassRpo_air
The RPO mass
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Air
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3109-31
10 with
3100=2
S
–
R
N/A
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
63
FRF_StiffnessLpo_mean
64
168
Access
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Enumerated List
of Values
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Modbus Register
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
The LPO stiffness
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Water
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3101 –
3102
with
3100=3
S
–
R
N/A
FRF_StiffnessRpo_water
The RPO stiffness
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Water
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3103-31
04 with
3100=3
S
–
R
N/A
80
FRF_Damping_water
The damping
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Water
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3105-31
06 with
3100=3
S
–
R
N/A
81
FRF_MassLpo_water
The LPO mass
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Water
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3107-31
08 with
3100=3
S
–
R
N/A
82
FRF_MassRpo_water
The RPO mass
calculated as a mean
during Factory Cal of
Water
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R–
3109-31
10 with
3100=3
S
–
R
N/A
83
ALERT_TIMEOUT
Alert Timeout
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R1512
S
R/W
(Any)
0 to 300 sec
Counts the number of
times the Meter
Verification algorithm
has run successfully.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-3017
S
0
R
N./A
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
78
FRF_StiffnessLpo_water
79
0
0
Enumerated List
of Values
Troubleshooting
Yes
Access
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Operation
OD Index
Table B-6
v5.0 Additions
84
FRF_FCFValidCounter
V6.0 Additions
Start On-Line Meter
Verification (Equivalent
to Reg 3000=6)
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
Coil 190
S
0
RW
(Any)
Value part of
DS-66
0 = no action
1 = Start Meter
Verification in
continue
measurement
mode
86
FRF_MV_Index
FCF Datalog Index
(0-19, 0 = most recent
run)
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
2984
S
0
RW
(Any)
N/A
87
FRF_MV_Counter
FCF Datalog Item 1:
Run Number
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
2985
S
-
R
N/A
88
FRF_MV_Status
FCF Datalog Item 2:
Status (Bit7 = FCF
pass/fail, Bits6-4 =
state, Bits3-0 = Abort
code) Abort States are
compressed to fit in 3
bits
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
2986
S
-
R
N/A
89
FRF_MV_Time
FCF Datalog Item 3:
Time Initiated
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
(4)
2987-29
88
S
-
R
N/A
90
FRF_MV_LPO_Norm
FCF Datalog Item 4:
LPO Normalized Data
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
2989-29
90
S
-
R
N/A
91
FRF_MV_RPO_Norm
FCF Datalog Item 5:
RPO Normalized Data
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
2991-29
92
S
-
R
N/A
92
FRF_DriveCurr
Drive Current
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3113-31
14
S
-
RW
(Any)
N/A
Configuration and Use Manual
TB Reference
FRF_StartMeterVer
PlantWeb Alerts
85
169
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Example Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Default Value
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-6
Definition
Message
Type
93
FRF_DL_T
Delta T
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3115-31
16
S
-
RW
(Any)
N/A
94
FRF_Temp
Temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3117-31
18
S
-
R
N/A
95
FRF_Density
Density
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3119-31
20
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
96
FRF_DriveFreq
Drive Frequency
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3121-31
22
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
97
FRF_LpoFilt
LPO Filter
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3123-31
24
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
98
FRF_RpoFilt
RPO Filter
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3125-31
26
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
99
FRF_DataSetSelIndex
FCF Verification Data
Set Selection
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
Unsigne
d16 (2)
S
-
RW
(Any)
0=Current Data
Means
1=Current Data
Std Deviations
2=Factory Cal of
Air Means
3=Factory Cal of
Water Means
4=Running
average data
5=Standard Error
of the Estimate
100
FRF_MV_FirstRun_Time
FCF Timers: Time
Until First Run in
Hours ( Applicable
only if Meter
Verification Feature is
Enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
2993-29
94
S
-
RW
(Any)
N/A
101
FRF_MV_Elapse_Time
FCF Timers: Time
between each run
after the first run
initiated in hours (
Applicable only if
Meter Verification is
Enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
2995-29
96
S
-
RW
(Any)
N/A
102
FRF_MV_Time_Left
FCF Timers: Time
Until Next Run in
Hours
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
2997-29
98
S
-
R
N/A
103
FRF_ToneLevel
Frf Tone Level (mA)
(Applicable only if
Meter Verification is
Enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3083-30
84
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
104
FRF_DriveFreq
Tone Ramp Time
(Seconds) (Applicable
only if Meter
Verification is enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3085-30
86
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
105
FRF_BlCoeff
BL Coef. ( Applicable
only if Meter
Verification feature is
enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3087-30
88
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
106
FRF_DriveTarget
FRF Drive Target
(Applicable only if
Meter Verification
Feature is Enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3089-30
90
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
107
FRF_DrivePCoeff
FRF Drive P
Coefficient (Applicable
only if Meter
Verification Feature is
Enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3091-30
92
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
Access
Parameter Mnemonic
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Enumerated List
of Values
V7.0 Changes - Moved from Calibration TB
170
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Example Value
109
Default Value
FRF_ToneSpacingMult
Add to CFF
108
Store/Rate (HZ)
Definition
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3159-31
60
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
FRF_Freq_DriftLimit
Frequency Drift Limit
(Applicable only if
Meter Verification
Feature is Enabled)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3161-31
62
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
110
FRF_Max_Current_mA
Max Sensor Current
(Applicable only if
Meter Verification
Feature is Enabled
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3163-31
64
S
-
RW
(OOS)
N/A
111
FRF_KFQ2
KFQ2 Linear Density
Correction for Stiffness
Value
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
3165-31
66
S
0
RW
(Any)
N/A
112
SYS_AnalogOutput_Fault
Indicates whether
there is a critical fault
present
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
-
-
0
R
Value part of
DS-66
0 = No Critical
Fault
1 = Critical Fault
Present
113
SNS_MV_Failed
Indicates whether
Meter Verification
Failed
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
R433/Bi
t #14
-
0
R
Value part of
DS-66
0 = Meter
Verification did not
Fail
1 = Meter
Verification Failed
Access
Tone Spacing
Multiplier (Applicable
only if Meter
Verification Feature is
Enabled)
Enumerated List
of Values
v7.0 Additions
OD
Index
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
View 4_1
View 4_2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
2
4
ALERT_KEY
1
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
7
XD_ERROR
1
1
8
SLUG_TIME
4
9
SLUG_LOW_LIMIT
4
10
SLUG_HIGH_LIMIT
4
PlantWeb Alerts
Table B-7
Troubleshooting
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Operation
Parameter Mnemonic
Modbus Register
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block parameters (continued)
OD Index
Table B-6
Slug Flow Setup
TB Reference
Alarm Status
11
ALARM1_STATUS
2
2
12
ALARM2_STATUS
2
2
13
ALARM3_STATUS
2
2
14
ALARM4_STATUS
2
2
Configuration and Use Manual
171
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-7
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views (continued)
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
15
FAULT_LIMIT_CODE
2
16
LAST_MEASURED_VALUE_FAULT_TIMEOUT
2
17
ALARM_INDEX
2
18
ALARM_SEVERITY
2
19
DRIVE_GAIN
20
TUBE_FREQUENCY
4
21
LIVE_ZERO
4
22
LEFT_PICKOFF_VOLTAGE
4
23
RIGHT_PICKOFF_VOLTAGE
4
24
BOARD_TEMPERATURE
4
25
ELECT_TEMP_MAX
4
26
ELECT_TEMP_MIN
4
27
ELECT_TEMP_AVG
4
28
SENSOR_TEMP_MAX
4
29
SENSOR_TEMP_MIN
4
30
SENSOR_TEMP_AVG
4
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
View 4_1
View 4_2
Diagnostics
5
5
31
RTD_RESISTANCE_CABLE
4
32
RTD_RESISTANCE_METER
4
33
CP_POWER_CYCLE
2
34
MFP_SAVE_FACTORY
2
35
MFP_RESET_STATS
2
36
EN_MFP
2
37
MFP_UNITS
2
38
MFP_TV_INDEX
2
39
MFP_TYPE
40
MFP_TV_INST
4
41
MFP_TV_AVG
4
42
MFP_TV_STD_DEV
4
Meter Fingerprinting
2
43
MFP_TV_MAX
4
44
MFP_TV_MIN
4
v4.0 Additions
172
45
DIAG_FEATURE_KEY
46
SYS_PowerOnTimeSec
4
2
47
SNS_InputVoltage
4
48
SNS_TargetAmplitude
4
49
SNS_CaseRTDRes
4
50
SYS_RestoreFactoryConfig
2
51
SNS_FlowZeroRestore
2
52
SNS_AutoZeroFactory
4
53
SYS_ResetPowerOnTime
54
FRF_EnableFCFValidation
2
2
55
FRF_FaultAlarm
2
56
FRF_StiffnessLimit
4
57
FRF_AlgoState
2
58
FRF_AbortCode
2
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-7
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views (continued)
Parameter Mnemonic
59
FRF_StateAtAbort
2
60
FRF_Progress
2
61
FRF_StiffOutLimLpo
2
62
FRF_StiffOutLimRpo
2
63
FRF_StiffnessLpo_mean
4
64
FRF_StiffnessRpo_mean
4
65
FRF_Damping_mean
4
66
FRF_MassLpo_mean
4
67
FRF_MassRpo_mean
4
68
FRF_StiffnessLpo_stddev
4
69
FRF_StiffnessRpo_stddev
4
70
FRF_Damping_stddev
4
71
FRF_MassLpo_stddev
4
72
FRF_MassRpo_stddev
4
73
FRF_StiffnessLpo_air
4
74
FRF_StiffnessRpo_air
4
75
FRF_Damping_air
4
76
FRF_MassLpo_air
4
77
FRF_MassRpo_air
4
78
FRF_StiffnessLpo_water
4
79
FRF_StiffnessRpo_water
4
80
FRF_Damping_water
4
81
FRF_MassLpo_water
4
82
FRF_MassRpo_water
83
ALERT_TIMEOUT
84
FRF_FCFValidCounter
85
FRF_StartMeterVer
2
86
FRF_MV_Index
2
87
FRF_MV_Counter
2
88
FRF_MV_Status
2
89
FRF_MV_Time
4
90
FRF_MV_LPO_Norm
4
91
FRF_MV_RPO_Norm
4
92
FRF_DriveCurr
4
93
FRF_DL_T
4
94
FRF_Temp
4
95
FRF_Density
4
96
FRF_DriveFreq
4
97
FRF_LpoFilt
4
98
FRF_RpoFilt
4
99
FRF_DataSetSelIndex
4
100
FRF_MV_FirstRun_Time
4
101
FRF_MV_Elapse_Time
4
102
FRF_MV_Time_Left
4
103
FRF_Density
4
104
FRF_ToneRampTime
4
105
FRF_BlCoeff
4
View 2
View 3
View 4
View 4_1
View 4_2
Troubleshooting
4
2
2
PlantWeb Alerts
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
View 1
Operation
OD
Index
173
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-7
DIAGNOSTICS transducer block views (continued)
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
106
FRF_DriveTarget
4
107
FRF_DrivePCoeff
4
108
FRF_ToneSpacingMult
4
109
FRF_Freq_DriftLimit
4
110
FRF_Max_Current_mA
4
111
FRF_KFQ2
4
112
SYS_AnalogOutput_Fault
113
SNS_MV_Failed
View 1
View 4
View 4_1
View 4_2
2
22
26
112
39
96
100
DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters
Access
Default Value
Add to CFF
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Example Value
DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters
Modbus Register
Table B-8
OD Index
View 3
2
Totals
B.5
View 2
Enumerated List
of Values
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the
transducer block
VARIABLE
DS_64 (5)
N/A
S
N/A
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
1
ST_REV
The revision level of
the static data
associated with the
function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
0
R
N/A
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of
the intended
application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(32)
N/A
S
Yes
Spaces
"
"
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
Any 32 Characters
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
S
Yes
0
1
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
1 to 255
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69 (4)
N/A
mix
Yes
Auto
01
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
See section 2/6 of
FF-891
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter
reflects the error status
associated with the
hardware or software
components
associated with a
block.
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
R
See section 4.8 of
FF-903
174
-
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
7
Used for all config,
H/W, connection
failure or system
problems in the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
D
-
Access
XD_ERROR
Example Value
Definition
Default Value
Parameter Mnemonic
Add to CFF
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Modbus Register
DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List
of Values
R
18 = Process
Error
19 = Configuration
Error
20 = Electronics
Failure
21 = Sensor
Failure
R/W
(Any)
0
Operation
OD Index
Table B-8
Transmitter Data
SERIAL_NUMBER
Serial number of this
device
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
(4)
R-48-4
9
S
Yes
0
0
9
OPTION_BOARD_CODE
Code of the Output
Option Board
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-113
8
S
20
R
0 = None
2 = Foundation
Fieldbus (LC302
board)
20 = Foundation
Fieldbus (Hornet
board)
10
700_SW_REV
Model 700 Transmitter
software revision
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-113
7
S
S/W
Rev
R
N/A
11
2700_SW_REV
Model 2700
Transmitter software
revision
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-120
0
S
S/W
Rev
R
N/A
12
CEQ_NUMBER
Model 2700
Transmitter CEQ
Number
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-500
5
S
S/W
Rev
R
N/A
13
DESCRIPTION
User Text
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(16)
R-96-1
03
S
Yes
“CONFI
GURE
XMTR”
“CON
FIGU
RE
XMT
R”
R/W
(Any)
0
R/W
(Any)
Troubleshooting
8
Sensor Data
0
SENSOR_SN
Sensor serial number
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
(4)
R-012
7-128
S
Yes
0
15
SENSOR_TYPE
Sensor type (i.e. F200,
CMF025)
STRING
VISIBLE
STRING
(16)
R-042
5
S
“@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@”
“@@@
@@@
@@@
@@@
@@@
@”
16
SENSOR_TYPE_CODE
Sensor type code
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-113
9
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
0 = Curve Tube
1 = Straight Tube
17
SENSOR_MATERIAL
Sensor Material
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-013
0
S
Yes
253
253
R/W
(Any)
3 = Hastelloy
C-22
4 = Monel
5 = Tantalum
6 = Titanium
19 = 316L
stainless steel
23 = Inconel
252 = Unknown
253 = Special
18
SENSOR_LINER
Liner Material
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-013
1
S
Yes
253
253
R/W
(Any)
10 = PTFE
(teflon)
11 = Halar
16 = Tefzel
251 = None
252 = Unknown
253 = Special
R
175
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
PlantWeb Alerts
14
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Message
Type
19
SENSOR_END
Flange Type
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-012
9
S
20
MASS_MIN_RANGE
Mass flow minimum
range
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-181182
S
21
TEMP_MIN_RANGE
Temperature minimum
range
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-183184
22
HIGH_DENSITY_LIMIT
High density limit of
sensor (g/cc)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-187188
23
VOLUME_MIN_RANGE
Volume flow minimum
range
VARIABLE
FLOAT
24
SNS_PuckDeviceTypeCode
Device Type for the
attached Core
Processor
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
25
AI_SIMULATE_MODE
AI Simulate Mode
ENUM
26
SNS_HartDeviceID
Core Processor
Unique ID
27
SYS_DeviceType
Transmitter Device
Type
Table B-9
OD
Index
Yes
0 = ANSI 150
1 = ANSI 300
2 = ANSI 600
5 = PN 40
7 = JIS 10K
8 = JIS 20K
9 = ANSI 900
10 = Sanitary
Clamp Fitting
11 = Union
12 = PN 100
251 = None
252 = Unknown
253 = Special
Calc
R
N/A
S
Calc
R
N/A
S
Calc
R
N/A
S
Calc
R/W
N/A
R-116
2
S
-
R
40 = 700 (CP)
50 = 800 (ECP)
Unsigned16
(2)
C-84
S
R/W
(Any)
0 = disabled
1 = enabled
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
(4)
R-118
7-1188
S
0
R
N/A
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-120
S
43
R
N/A
0
253
Enumerated List
of Values
R/W
(Any)
Yes
253
Access
Definition
Default Value
Parameter Mnemonic
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Example Value
DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block parameters (continued)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-8
0
DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block views
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
2
2
2
2
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
4
ALERT_KEY
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
7
XD_ERROR
1
1
2
1
Transmitter Data
8
SERIAL_NUMBER
4
9
OPTION_BOARD_CODE
10
700_SW_REV
2
2
11
2700_SW_REV
2
12
CEQ_NUMBER
2
13
DESCRIPTION
14
SENSOR_SN
16
Sensor Data
176
4
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-9
DEVICE INFORMATION transducer block views (continued)
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
15
SENSOR_TYPE
16
16
SENSOR_TYPE_CODE
2
17
SENSOR_MATERIAL
2
18
SENSOR_LINER
2
19
SENSOR_END
2
20
MASS_MIN_RANGE
4
21
TEMP_MIN_RANGE
4
22
DENSITY_MIN_RANGE
4
23
VOLUME_MIN_RANGE
4
24
SNS_PuckDeviceTypeCode
2
25
AI_SIMULATE_MODE
2
26
SNS_HartDeviceID
4
27
SYS_DeviceType
View 3
View 4
Troubleshooting
2
Totals
B.6
View 2
Operation
View 1
9
16
9
73
LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters
Following are the parameters (Table B-10) and views (Table B-11) for the LOCAL DISPLAY
transducer block.
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Modbus Register
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Enumerated List
of Values
Standard FF Parameters
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the
transducer block
VARIABLE
DS_64 (5)
N/A
S
N/A
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
1
ST_REV
The revision level of
the static data
associated with the
function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
0
R
N/A
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of
the intended
application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(32)
N/A
S
Yes
Spaces
"
"
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
Any 32 Characters
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
S
Yes
0
1
R/W
1 to 255
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69 (4)
N/A
mix
Auto
01
R/W
See section 2/6 of
FF-891
Configuration and Use Manual
177
TB Reference
0
PlantWeb Alerts
OD Index
Table B-10 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-10 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List
of Values
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter
reflects the error status
associated with the
hardware or software
components
associated with a
block.
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
See section 4.8 of
FF-903
7
XD_ERROR
Used for all config,
H/W, connection
failure of system
problems in the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
D
-
R
18 = Process
Error
19 = Configuration
Error
20 = Electronics
Failure
21 = Sensor
Failure
LDO
8
EN_LDO_TOT_RESET
Enable/Disable LDO
Totalizer Reset
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0094
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
9
EN_LDO_TOT_START_STO
P
Enable/Disable LDO
Totalizer Start/Stop
option
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0091
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
10
EN_LDO_AUTO_SCROLL
Enable/Disable LDO
Auto Scroll Feature
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0095
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
11
EN_LDO_OFFLINE_MENU
Enable/Disable LDO
Offline Menu Feature
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0096
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
12
EN_LDO_OFFLINE_PWD
Enable/Disable LDO
Offline Password
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0097
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
0x0000 = disabled
0x0001 = enabled
13
EN_LDO_ALARM_MENU
Enable/Disable LDO
Alarm Menu
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
0x0000 = disabled
0x0001 = enabled
14
EN_LDO_ACK_ALL_ALARMS
Enable/Disable LDO
Acknowledge All
alarms feature
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(Any)
0x0000 = disabled
0x0001 = enabled
15
LDO_OFFLINE_PWD
LDO offline password
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
1234
1234
R/W
(Any)
0 - 9999
16
LDO_SCROLL_RATE
LDO Scroll rate
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(Any)
-
17
LDO_BACKLIGHT_ON
LDO Backlight Control
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(Any)
0 = off
1 = on
18
UI_Language
Display language
selection
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = English
1 = German
2 = French
3 = Reserved
4 = Spanish
19
LDO_VAR_1_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
178
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Modbus Register
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Enumerated List
of Values
LDO_VAR_2_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
2
2
R/W
(Any)
0 = Mass Flow
Rate
1 = Temperature
2 = Mass Total
3 = Density
4 = Mass Inventory
5 = Volume Flow
Rate
6 = Volume Total
7 = Volume
Inventory
15 = API: Corr
Density
16 = API: Corr Vol
Flow
17 = API: Corr Vol
Total
18 = API: Corr Vol
Inv
19 = API: Avg
Density
20 = API: Avg
Temp
21 = ED: Density
At Ref
22 = ED: Density (
SGU)
23 = ED: Std Vol
Flow Rate
24 = ED: Std Vo
Total
25 = ED: Std Vol
Inventory
26 = ED: Net Mass
Flow
27 = ED: Net Mass
Total
28 = ED: Net Mass
Inv
29 = ED: Net Vol
Flow Rate
30 = ED: Net Vol
Total
31 = ED: Net Vol
Inventory
32 = ED:
Concentration
33 = API: CTL
46 = Raw Tube
Frequency
47 = Drive Gain
48 = Case
Temperature
49 = LPO
Amplitude
50 = RPO
Amplitude
51 = Board
Temperature
52 = NA
53 = Ext. Input
Pressure
54 = NA
55 = Ext. Input
Temp
56 = ED: Density
(Baume)
62 = Gas Std Vol
Flow
63 = Gas Std Vol
Total
64 = Gat Std Vol
Inventory
69 = Live Zero
251 = None
21
LDO_VAR_3_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
5
5
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
22
LDO_VAR_4_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
6
6
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
Configuration and Use Manual
179
TB Reference
20
PlantWeb Alerts
Definition
Troubleshooting
Parameter Mnemonic
Operation
OD Index
Table B-10 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters (continued)
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-10 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List
of Values
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
23
LDO_VAR_5_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
3
3
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
24
LDO_VAR_6_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
25
LDO_VAR_7_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
26
LDO_VAR_8_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
27
LDO_VAR_9_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
28
LDO_VAR_10_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
29
LDO_VAR_11_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
30
LDO_VAR_12_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
31
LDO_VAR_13_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
ENUM
Unsigned16
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
32
LDO_VAR_14_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
ENUM
Unsigned16
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
33
LDO_VAR_15_CODE
Display the Variable
associated with the
code on the LDO
ENUM
Unsigned16
S
Yes
251
251
R/W
Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
34
FBUS_UI_ProcVarIndex
Process Variable Code
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
Same as
LDO_VAR_2_CO
DE
35
UI_NumDecimals
The number of digits
displayed to the right
of the decimal point for
the process variable
selected with index 34
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
4
4
R/W
(Any)
0 to 5
36
UI_UpdatePeriodmsec
The period in
milliseconds in which
the display is updated
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
200
200
R/W
(Any)
100 to 10000
37
UI_EnableStatusLedBlinking
Enable/Disable
Display Status LED
Blinking
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
1
1
R/W
(Any)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
38
UI_EnableAlarmPassword
Enable/Disable
Display Alarm Screen
Password
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Table B-11 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block views
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
2
2
2
2
Standard FF Parameters
180
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
2
4
ALERT_KEY
1
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-11 LOCAL DISPLAY transducer block views (continued)
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
XD_ERROR
1
1
7
View 2
View 3
View 4
Operation
OD
Index
LDO
8
EN_LDO_TOT_RESET
2
9
EN_LDO_TOT_START_STOP
2
10
EN_LDO_AUTO_SCROLL
2
11
EN_LDO_OFFLINE_MENU
2
12
EN_LDO_OFFLINE_PWD
2
13
EN_LDO_ALARM_MENU
2
14
EN_LDO_ACK_ALL_ALARMS
15
LDO_OFFLINE_PWD
16
LDO_SCROLL_RATE
2
17
LDO_BACKLIGHT_ON
2
18
UI_Language
2
19
LDO_VAR_1_CODE
2
20
LDO_VAR_2_CODE
2
21
LDO_VAR_3_CODE
2
22
LDO_VAR_4_CODE
2
23
LDO_VAR_5_CODE
2
24
LDO_VAR_6_CODE
2
25
LDO_VAR_7_CODE
2
26
LDO_VAR_8_CODE
2
27
LDO_VAR_9_CODE
2
28
LDO_VAR_10_CODE
2
29
LDO_VAR_11_CODE
2
30
LDO_VAR_12_CODE
2
31
LDO_VAR_13_CODE
2
32
LDO_VAR_14_CODE
2
33
LDO_VAR_15_CODE
2
34
FBUS_UI_ProcVarIndex
2
35
UI_NumDecimals
2
36
UI_UpdatePeriodmsec
2
37
UI_EnableStatusLedBlinking
2
38
UI_EnableAlarmPassword
Troubleshooting
PlantWeb Alerts
Totals
2
2
2
9
4
9
65
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
181
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
B.7
API transducer block parameters
Following are the parameters (Table B-12) and views (Table B-13) for the API transducer block.
Access (MODE_BLK)
Example Value
Data Type/
Structure
Default Value
Message
Type
Add to CFF
Definition
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-12 API transducer block parameters
Enumerated List
of Values
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the
transducer block
VARIABLE
DS_64 (5)
N/A
S
N/A
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
1
ST_REV
The revision level of
the static data
associated with the
function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
0
R
N/A
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of
the intended
application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(32)
N/A
S
Yes
Spaces
"
"
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
Any 32 Characters
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
S
Yes
0
1
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
1 to 255
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69 (4)
N/A
mix
Yes
Auto
01
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
See section 2/6 of
FF-891
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter
reflects the error status
associated with the
hardware or software
components
associated with a
block.
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
See section 4.8 of
FF-903
7
XD_ERROR
Used for all config,
H/W, connection
failure or system
problems in the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
D
-
R
18 = Process
Error
19 = Configuration
Error
20 = Electronics
Failure
21 = Sensor
Failure
API Process Variables
8
API_Corr_Density
Temp Corrected
Density
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0325
-326
D/20
–
R
N/A
9
API_Corr_Vol_Flow
Temp Corrected
(Standard) Volume
Flow
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0331
-332
D/20
–
R
N/A
10
API_Ave_Corr_Density
Batch Weighted
Average Density
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0337
-338
D/20
–
R
N/A
11
API_Ave_Corr_Temp
Batch Weighted
Average Temperature
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-339340
D/20
–
R
N/A
12
API_CTL
CTL
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0329
-330
D/20
–
R
N/A
13
API_Corr_Vol_Total
Temp Corrected
(Standard) Volume
Total
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0333
-0334
D/20
–
R
N/A
182
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Temp Corrected
(Standard) Volume
Inventory
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-0335
-336
D/20
Reset API Reference
Volume Total
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
C-0058
-
Yes(1)
–
14
API_Corr_Vol_Inv
15
API_Reset_Vol_Total
Access (MODE_BLK)
Data Type/
Structure
Definition
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Modbus Register
Message
Type
Parameter Mnemonic
–
Operation
OD Index
Table B-12 API transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List
of Values
R
N/A
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of
DS-66
0 = No effect
1 = Reset
0 = disabled
1 = enabled
API Setup Data
Enable/Disable API
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-72
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
17
API_Ref_Temp
API Reference Temp
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0319
-0320
S
Yes (1)
15
15.0
R/W
(OOS)
18
API_TEC
API Thermal
Expansion Coeff
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-0323
-0324
S
Yes (1)
0.001
0.001
R/W
(OOS)
19
API_Table_Type
API 2540 CTL Table
Type
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0351
S
Yes (1)
81
81
R/W
(OOS)
17 = Table 5A
18= Table 5B
19= Table 5D
36= Table 6C
49= Table 23A
50= Table 23B
51= Table 23D
68= Table 24C
81 = Table 53A
82 = Table 53B
83 = Table 53D
100 = Table 54C
20
API_FEATURE_KEY
Enabled Features
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
R
0x0000 =
standard
0x0800 = Meter
Verifi.
0x0080 = PID (Not
Applicable)
0x0008 = Enh.
Density
0x0010 = API
21
SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv
Reset API/GSV
Inventory
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
R/W
(Any)
0 = No effect
1 = Reset
S
C-0194
S
-
Yes (1)
0
0
PlantWeb Alerts
EN_API
Troubleshooting
16
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
183
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access (MODE_BLK)
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-12 API transducer block parameters (continued)
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
Enumerated List
of Values
22
API_TEMPERATURE_U
NITS
Temperature Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0041
S
C
R
1000 = K
1001 = Deg C
1002 = Deg F
1003 = Deg R
23
API_DENSITY_UNITS
Density Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0040
S
g/cm3
R
1097 = kg/m3
1100 = g/cm3
1103 = kg/L
1104 = g/ml
1105 = g/L
1106 = lb/in3
1107 = lb/ft3
1108 = lb/gal
1109 = Ston/yd3
1113 = DegAPI
1114 = SGU
24
API_VOL_FLOW_UNITS
Standard or special
volume flow rate unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0042
S
1/s
R
1347 = m3/s
1348 = m 3/min
1349 = m3/hr
1350 = m3/day
1351 = L/s
1352 = L/min
1353 = L/hr
1355 = Ml/day
1356 = CFS
1357 = CFM
1358 = CFH
1359 = ft3/day /
Standard cubic
ft. per day
1362 = gal/s
1363 = GPM
1364 = gal/hour
1365 = gal/day
1366 = Mgal/day
1367 = ImpGal/s
1368 =
ImpGal/min
1369 = ImpGal/hr
1370 = Impgal/day
1371 = bbl/s
1372 = bbl/min
1373 = bbl/hr
1374 = bbl/day
1631 = barrel (US
Beer) per
day
1632 = barrel (US
Beer) per
hour
1633 = barrel (US
Beer) per
minute
1634 =barrel (US
Beer) per
Second
253 = Special
units
(1) Writable only if the API feature is enabled.
184
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-13 API transducer block views
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
2
2
2
2
Operation
OD
Index
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
4
ALERT_KEY
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
7
XD_ERROR
1
1
2
1
API Process Variables
API_Corr_Density
5
5
9
API_Corr_Vol_Flow
5
5
10
API_Ave_Corr_Density
5
5
11
API_Ave_Corr_Temp
5
5
12
API_CTL
5
5
13
API_Corr_Vol_Total
5
5
14
API_Corr_Vol_Inv
5
15
API_Reset_Vol_Total
Troubleshooting
8
5
2
API Setup Data
16
EN_API
2
17
API_Ref_Temp
4
18
API_TEC
4
19
API_Table_Type
2
20
API_FEATURE_KEY
2
SNS_ResetAPIGSVInv
2
22
API_TEMPERATURE_UNITS
2
23
API_DENSITY_UNITS
2
24
API_VOL_FLOW_UNITS
2
Totals
44
12
44
PlantWeb Alerts
21
19
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
185
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
B.8
CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters
Access (MODE_BLK)
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-14 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters
Enumerated List of
Values
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the
transducer block
VARIABLE
DS_64 (5)
N/A
S
N/A
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
1
ST_REV
The revision level of
the static data
associated with the
function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
0
R
N/A
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of
the intended
application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
(32)
N/A
S
Yes
Spaces
"
"
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
Any 32 Characters
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can
be used to identify
grouping of blocks.
This data is not
checked or processed
by the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
N/A
S
Yes
0
0
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
N/A
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification
number of the plant
unit. This information
may be used in the
host for sorting alarms,
etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
N/A
S
Yes
0
1
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
1 to 255
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69 (4)
N/A
mix
Yes
Auto
01
R/W
(OOS
or
Auto)
See section 2/6 of
FF-891
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter
reflects the error status
associated with the
hardware or software
components
associated with a
block.
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
N/A
D/20
-
R
See section 4.8 of
FF-903
7
XD_ERROR
Used for all config,
H/W, connection
failure or system
problems in the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
(1)
D
-
R
18 = Process Error
19 = Configuration
Error
20 = Electronics
Failure
21 = Sensor Failure
CM Process Variables
8
CM_Ref_Dens
Density At Reference
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-963
D/20
–
R
N/A
9
CM_Spec_Grav
Density (Fixed SG
Units)
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-965
D/20
–
R
N/A
10
CM_Std_Vol_Flow
Standard Volume Flow
Rate
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-967
D/20
–
R
N/A
11
CM_Net_Mass_Flow
Net Mass Flow Rate
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-973
D/20
–
R
N/A
12
CM_Net_Vol_Flow
Net Volume Flow Rate
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-979
D/20
–
R
N/A
13
CM_Conc
Concentration
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-985
D/20
–
R
N/A
14
CM_Baume
Density (Fixed Baume
Units)
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-987
D/20
–
R
N/A
CM Totals
15
CM_Std_Vol_Total
Standard Volume Total
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-969
D/20
–
R
N/A
16
CM_Std_Vol_Inv
Standard Volume
Inventory
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-971
D/20
–
R
N/A
186
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access (MODE_BLK)
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Modbus Register
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Operation
OD Index
Table B-14 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List of
Values
Net Mass Total
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-975
D/20
–
R
N/A
CM_Net_Mass_Inv
Net Mass Inventory
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-977
D/20
–
R
N/A
19
CM_Net_Vol_Total
Net Volume Total
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-981
D/20
–
R
N/A
20
CM_Net_Vol_Inv
Net Volume Inventory
VARIABLE
DS-65 (5)
R-983
D/20
–
R
N/A
21
CM_Reset_Std_Vol_Total
Reset CM Standard
Volume Total
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C-59
-
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of DS-66
1 = Reset
22
CM_Reset_Net_Mass_Tot
al
Reset CM Net Mass
Total
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C-60
-
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of DS-66
1 = Reset
23
CM_Reset_Net_Vol_Total
Reset CM Net Volume
Total
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
C-61
-
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of DS-66
1 = Reset
24
EN_CM
Enable/Disable
Concentration
Measurement
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
25
CM_Curve_Lock
Lock Concentration
Measurement Tables
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
26
CM_Mode
Concentration
Measurement Mode
ENUM
27
CM_Active_Curve
Active Calculation
Curve
28
CM_Curve_Index
29
CM Setup Data
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0x0000 = disabled
0x0001 = enabled
C-85
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0x0000 = not locked
0x0001 = locked
Unsigned16
(2)
R-524
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
0 = None
1= Dens @ Ref Temp
2= Specific Gravity
3= Mass Conc (Dens)
4=Mass Conc (SG)
5= Volume Conc
(Dens)
6= Volume Conc (SG)
7= Concentration
(Dens)
8 = Concentration
(SG)
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-523
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 through 5
Curve Configuration
Index (n)
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 through 5
CM_Temp_Index
Curven Temperature
Isotherm Index (x-axis)
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 through 5
30
CM_Conc_Index
Curven Concentration
Index (y-axis)
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 through 5
31
CM_Temp_ISO
Curven (6x5)
Temperature Isothermx
Value (x-axis)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-531
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
32
CM_Dens_At_Temp_ISO
Curven (6x5) Density
@ Temperature
IsothermX,
ConcentrationY
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-533
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
33
CM_Dens_At_Temp_Coeff
Curven (6x5) Coeff @
Temperature
IsothermX,
ConcentrationY
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-535
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
34
CM_Conc_Label_55
Curven (6x5)
ConcentrationY Value
(Label for y-axis)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-537
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
35
CM_Dens_At_Conc
Curven (5x1) Density
at ConcentrationY (at
Ref Temp)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-539
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
36
CM_Dens_At_Conc_Coeff
Curven (5x1) Coeff at
ConcentrationY (at Ref
Temp)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-541
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
37
CM_Conc_Label_51
Curven (5x1)
ConcentrationY Value
(y-axis)
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-543
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
Configuration and Use Manual
TB Reference
S
PlantWeb Alerts
CM_Net_Mass_Total
18
Troubleshooting
17
187
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access (MODE_BLK)
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Message
Type
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-14 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List of
Values
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
38
CM_Ref_Temp
Curven Reference
Temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-545
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
39
CM_SG_Water_Ref_Temp
Curven SG Water
Reference
Temperature
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-547
S
Yes(1)
0
4.0
R/W
(OOS)
40
CM_SG_Water_Ref_Dens
Curven SG Water
Reference Density
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-549
S
Yes(1)
0
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
41
CM_Slope_Trim
Curven Slope Trim
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-551
S
Yes(1)
0
1.0
R/W
(OOS)
42
CM_Slope_Offset
Curven Offset Trim
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-553
S
Yes(1)
0
0.0
R/W
(OOS)
43
CM_Extrap_Alarm_Limit
Curven Extrapolation
Alarm Limit: %
VARIABLE
FLOAT (4)
R-555
S
Yes(1)
5
5.0
R/W
(Any)
44
CM_Curve_Name
Curven ASCII String –
Name of Curve – 12
chars supported
VARIABLE
VISIBLE
STRING
(12)
R-557-5
62
S
Yes(1)
“””Empty
Curve”
“Empty
Curve”
R/W
(Any)
45
CM_Max_Fit_Order
Maximum Fit Order for
5x5 curve
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
(2)
R-564
S
Yes(1)
3
3
R/W
(OOS)
2, 3, 4, 5 (Shall
accept only enum
values)
46
CM_Fit_Results
Curven Curve Fit
Results
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-569
S
R
0 = Good
1 = Poor
2 = Failed
3 = Empty
47
CM_Conc_Unit_Code
Curven Concentration
Units Code
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-570
S
R/W
(OOS)
1110 = Degrees
Twaddell
1426= Degrees Brix
1111= Deg Baume
(heavy)
1112= Deg Baume
(light)
1343=% sol/wt
1344=% sol/vol
1427= Degrees
Balling
1428= Proof Per
Volume
1429 = Proof Per
mass
1346 = Percent Plato
48
CM_Expected_Acc
Curven Curve Fit
Expected Accuracy
VARIABLE
FLOAT(4)
R-571
S
0
R
49
CM_FEATURE_KEY
Enabled Features
STRING
BIT
STRING (2)
R-5000
S
-
R
0x0000 = standard
0x0800 = Meter
Verifi.
0x0080 = PID (Not
Applicable)
0x0008 = Enh.
Density
0x0010 = API
0
Yes(1)
1343
1343
Shall accept > 0.8
v4.0 Additions
50
SNS_ResetCMVolInv
Reset CM Volume
Inventory
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0195
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = No effect
1 = Reset
51
SNS_ResetCMNetMassIn
v
Reset CM Net Mass
Inventory
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0196
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = No effect
1 = Reset
52
SNS_ResetCMNetVolInv
Reset CM Net Volume
Inventory
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-0197
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(Any)
0 = No effect
1 = Reset
53
SNS_CM_ResetFlag
Reset All
Concentration
Measurement Curve
Information
Method
Unsigned16
(2)
C-249
S
Yes(1)
0
0
R/W
(OOS)
1 = Reset
188
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access (MODE_BLK)
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Store/Rate (HZ)
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Modbus Register
Message
Type
Operation
OD Index
Table B-14 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List of
Values
SNS_CM_EnableDensLow
Extrap
Enable Low Density
Extrapolation Alarm
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-250
S
Yes(1)
0
1
R/W
(Any)
1 = Enable
55
SNS_CM_EnableDensHig
hExtrap
Enable High Density
Extrapolation Alarm
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-251
S
Yes(1)
0
1
R/W
(Any)
1 = Enable
56
SNS_CM_EnableTempLo
wExtrap
Enable Low
Temperature
Extrapolation Alarm
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-252
S
Yes(1)
0
1
R/W
(Any)
1 = Enable
57
SNS_CM_EnableTempHig
hExtrap
Enable High
Temperature
Extrapolation Alarm
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
C-253
S
Yes(1)
0
1
R/W
(Any)
1 = Enable
58
CM_TEMPERATURE_
UNITS
Temperature Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0041
S
C°
R
1000 = K
1001 = Deg C
1002 = Deg F
1003 = Deg R
59
CM_DENSITY_UNITS
Density Unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R-0040
S
g/cm3
R
1097 = kg/m3
1100 = g/cm3
1103 = kg/L
1104 = g/ml
1105 = g/L
1106 = lb/in3
1107 = lb/ft3
1108 = lb/gal
1109 = Ston/yd3
1113 = DegAPI
1114 = SGU
60
CM_VOL_FLOW_UNITS
Standard or special
volume flow rate unit
ENUM
Unsigned16
(2)
R- 0042
S
l/s
R
1347 = m3/s
1348 = m 3/min
1349 = m3/hr
1350 = m3/day
1351 = L/s
1352 = L/min
1353 = L/hr
1355 = Ml/day
1356 = CFS
1357 = CFM
1358 = CFH
1359 = ft3/day /
Standard cubic ft. per
day
1362 = gal/s
1363 = GPM
1364 = gal/hour
1365 = gal/day
1366 = Mgal/day
1367 = ImpGal/s
1368 = ImpGal/min
1369 = ImpGal/hr
1370 = Impgal/day
1371 = bbl/s
1372 = bbl/min
1373 = bbl/hr
1374 = bbl/day
1631 = barrel (US
Beer) per day
1632 = barrel (US
Beer) per hour
1633 = barrel (US
Beer) per minute
v6.0 Additions
Configuration and Use Manual
189
TB Reference
54
PlantWeb Alerts
Definition
Troubleshooting
Parameter Mnemonic
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Access (MODE_BLK)
Example Value
Default Value
Add to CFF
Definition
Data Type/
Structure
(size in
bytes)
Store/Rate (HZ)
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Modbus Register
OD Index
Table B-14 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block parameters (continued)
Enumerated List of
Values
1634 =barrel (US
Beer) per Second
253 = Special units
v7.0 Additions
61
CM_Increment_Curve
Increment the Active
Curve to the next one.
VARIABLE
DS-66 (2)
-
-
0
R/W
(Any)
Value part of DS-66
0 = None
1 = Increment
(1) Writable only if the API feature is enabled.
Table B-15 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block views
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 4
2
2
2
2
Standard FF Parameters
0
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
2
4
ALERT_KEY
1
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
7
XD_ERROR
1
1
CM_Ref_Dens
5
5
9
CM_Spec_Grav
5
5
10
CM_Std_Vol_Flow
5
5
11
CM_Net_Mass_Flow
5
5
CM Process Variables
8
12
CM_Net_Vol_Flow
5
5
13
CM_Conc
5
5
14
CM_Baume
5
5
CM_Std_Vol_Total
5
5
16
CM_Std_Vol_Inv
5
5
17
CM_Net_Mass_Total
5
5
18
CM_Net_Mass_Inv
5
5
CM Totals
15
19
CM_Net_Vol_Total
5
5
20
CM_Net_Vol_Inv
5
5
21
CM_Reset_Std_Vol_Total
2
22
CM_Reset_Net_Mass_Total
2
23
CM_Reset_Net_Vol_Total
2
24
EN_CM
2
25
CM_CURVE_LOCK
2
26
CM_Mode
2
CM Setup Data
190
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
Table B-15 CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT transducer block views (continued)
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
27
CM_Active_Curve
2
28
CM_Curve_Index
2
29
CM_Temp_Index
2
30
CM_Conc_Index
2
31
CM_Temp_ISO
4
32
CM_Dens_At_Temp_ISO
4
33
CM_Dens_At_Temp_Coeff
4
34
CM_Conc_Label_55
4
35
CM_Dens_At_Conc
4
36
CM_Dens_At_Conc_Coeff
4
37
CM_Conc_Label_51
4
38
CM_Ref_Temp
4
39
CM_SG_Water_Ref_Temp
4
40
CM_SG_Water_Ref_Dens
4
41
CM_Slope_Trim
4
42
CM_Slope_Offset
4
43
CM_Extrap_Alarm_Limit
4
44
CM_Curve_Name
12
45
CM_Max_Fit_Order
46
CM_Fit_Results
47
CM_Conc_Unit_Code
48
CM_Expected_Acc
4
49
CM_FEATURE_KEY
2
View 2
View 3
View 4
Operation
View 1
Troubleshooting
2
2
2
v4.0 Additions
SNS_ResetCMVolInv
2
51
SNS_ResetCMNetMassInv
2
52
SNS_ResetCMNetVolInv
2
53
SNS_CM_ResetFlag
2
54
SNS_CM_EnableDensLowExtrap
2
55
SNS_CM_EnableDensHighExtrap
2
56
SNS_CM_EnableTempLowExtrap
2
57
SNS_CM_EnableTempHighExtrap
2
PlantWeb Alerts
50
v6.0 Additions
58
CM_TEMPERATURE_UNITS
2
59
CM_DENSITY_UNITS
2
60
CM_VOL_FLOW_UNITS
2
61
CM_Increment_Curve
v6.0 Additions
Totals
2
74
26
76
99
TB Reference
Configuration and Use Manual
191
Model 2700 transducer blocks reference
192
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Resource block parameters
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
Size
Access
Definition
Initial Value
Parameter Mnemonic
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Resource block parameters
Standard FF Parameters
BLOCK_STRUCTURE
Beginning of the resource
block
VARIABLE
DS_64
5
S
N/A
R/W
N/A
1.0
1
ST_REV
The revision level of the
static data associated with
the function block.
Incremented with each
write of static store.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
2
S
0
R
N/A
1.0
2
TAG_DESC
The user description of the
intended application of the
block.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
32
S
Spac
es
R/W
Any 32 Characters
1.0
3
STRATEGY
The strategy field can be
used to identify grouping
of blocks. This data is not
checked or processed by
the block.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
2
S
0
R/W
N/A
1.0
4
ALERT_KEY
The identification number
of the plant unit. This
information may be used
in the host for sorting
alarms, etc.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
S
0
R/W
0 to 255
1.0
5
MODE_BLK
The actual, target,
permitted and normal
modes of the block.
RECORD
DS-69
4
mix
Auto
R/W
See section 2.6 of FF-891
1.0
6
BLOCK_ERR
This parameter reflects
the error status associated
with the hardware or
software components
associated with a block.
STRING
BIT STRING 2
D/20
-
R
bit 0 = Other
bit 1 = Block Config Error
bit 3 = Simulate Active
bit 6 = Maintenance Soon
bit 7 = Input Failure
bit 8 = Output Failure
bit 9 = Memory Failure
bit 11 = Lost NV Data
bit 13 = Maintenance Now
bit 15 = Out of Service
1.0
7
RS_STATE
Contains the operational
state of the Function Block
Application.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
D/20
-
R
0 = Invalid State
1 = Start/Restart
2 = Initialization
3 = On-Line Linking
4 = On-Line
5 = Standby
6 = Failure
1.0
8
TEST_RW
Read/write test parameter
- used only for
conformance testing.
RECORD
DS-85
112
D/20
0
R
9
DD_RESOURCE
String identifying the tag of
the resource which
contains the Device
Description for this
resource.
STRING
OCTET
STRING
32
S
Spac
es
R
1.0
Any 32 Characters
1.0
193
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
375 Communicator
0
Diagrams
OD Index
Table C-1
Store/Rate (HZ)
C.1
RB Reference
Appendix C
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Access
Initial Value
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
Size
Manufacturer identification
number - used by an
interface device to locate
the DD file for the
resource.
ENUM
Unsigned32
4
S
0x00
0310
R
0x000310 = Micro Motion
1.0
DEV_TYPE
Manufacturer’s model
number associated with
the resource - used by
interface devices to locate
the DD file for the
resource.
ENUM
Unsigned16
2
S
0x20
00
R
0x2000 = 2700
1.0
12
DEV_REV(1)
Manufacturer revision
number associated with
the resource - used by an
interface device to locate
the DD file for the
resource.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
S
4
R
1.0
13
DD_REV(1)
Revision of the DD
associated with the
resource - used by an
interface device to locate
the DD file for the
resource.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
S
1
R
1.0
14
GRANT_DENY
Options for controlling
access of host computer
and local control panels to
operating, tuning and
alarm parameters of the
block.
RECORD
DS-70
2
S
0.0
R/W
1.0
15
HARD_TYPES
The types of hardware
available as channel
numbers.
ENUM
Bit String
2
S
0x80
R
0x80 = SCALAR_INPUT
1.0
16
RESTART
Allows a manual restart to
be initiated. Several
degrees of restart are
possible.
ENUM
Unsigned8
1
D
1
R/W
1 = Run
2 = Restart resource
3 = Restart with defaults
4 = Restart processor
1.0
17
FEATURES
Used to show supported
resource block options.
ENUM
Bit String
2
S
0x10
|
0x20
|
0x40
|
0x80
R
0x0010 = SoftWriteLock
0x0020 = FailSafe
0x0040 = Report
0x0080 = Unicode
1.0
18
FEATURE_SEL
Used to select resource
block options.
ENUM
Bit String
2
S
0x10
R/W
0x0010 = SoftWriteLock
0x0020 = FailSafe
0x0040 = Report
0x0080 = Unicode
1.0
19
CYCLE_TYPE
Identifies the block
execution methods
available for this resource.
ENUM
Bit String
2
S
0x80
|
0x40
R
0x0080 = CycleScheduled
0x0040 = BlockComplete
1.0
20
CYCLE_SEL
Used to select the block
execution method for this
resource.
ENUM
Bit String
2
S
0
RW
0x0080 = CycleScheduled
0x0040 = BlockComplete
1.0
21
MIN_CYCLE_T
Time duration of the
shortest cycle interval of
which the resource is
capable. Measured in 1/32
millisecond.
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
4
S
8000
R
1.0
22
MEMORY_SIZE
Available configuration
memory in the empty
resource in Kbytes. To be
checked before attempting
a download.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
2
S
8
R
1.0
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
10
MANUFAC_ID
11
194
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Resource block parameters continued
Store/Rate (HZ)
OD Index
Table C-1
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Size
Minimum time interval in
1/32 millisec specified by
the manufacturer for
writing copies of NV
parameters to non-volatile
memory. Zero means
it will never be
automatically copied. At
the end of
NV_CYCLE_TIME, only
those parameters which
have changed (as defined
by the manufacturer) need
to be updated in NVRAM
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
4
S
31,68 R
0,000
FREE_SPACE
Percent of memory
available for further
configuration. Zero in a
preconfigured resource.
VARIABLE
Float
4
D
-
R
0-100 Percent
1.0
25
FREE_TIME
Percent of the block
processing time that is
free to process additional
blocks.
VARIABLE
Float
4
D
-
R
0-100 Percent
1.0
26
SHED_RCAS
Time duration in 1/32
millisec at which to give up
on computer writes to
function block RCas
locations. Shed from
RCas shall never happen
when SHED_RCAS = 0.
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
4
S
6400
00
R/W
1.0
27
SHED_ROUT
Time duration in 1/32
millisec at which to give up
on computer writes to
function block ROut
locations. Shed from Rout
shall never happen when
SHED_ROUT = 0.
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
4
S
6400
00
R/W
1.0
28
FAULT_STATE
Condition set by loss of
communication to an
output block, fault
promoted to an output
block or a physical
contact. When Fault State
condition is set, Then
output function blocks will
perform their FSTATE
actions.
ENUM
Unsigned8
1
N
1
R
1 = Clear
2 = Active
1.0
29
SET_FSTATE
Allows the Fault State
condition to be manually
initiated by selecting Set.
ENUM
Unsigned8
1
D
1
R/W
1 = Off
2 = Set
1.0
30
CLR_FSTATE
Writing a Clear to this
parameter will clear the
device fault state if the
field condition, if any, has
cleared.
ENUM
Unsigned8
1
D
1
R/W
1 = Off
2 = Set
1.0
31
MAX_NOTIFY
Maximum number of
unconfirmed notify
messages possible.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
S
5
R
32
LIM_NOTIFY
Maximum number of
unconfirmed alert notify
messages allowed.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
S
5
R/W
33
CONFIRM_TIME
The time in 1/32 millisec
the resource will wait for
confirmation of receipt of a
report before trying again.
Retry shall not happen
when
CONFIRM_TIME = 0.
VARIABLE
Unsigned32
4
S
6400
00
R/W
34
WRITE_LOCK
If locked, no writes from
anywhere are allowed,
except to clear
WRITE_LOCK. Block
inputs will continue to be
updated.
ENUM
Unsigned8
1
S
1
R/W
23
NV_CYCLE_T
24
1.0
0 to MAX_NOTIFY
1.0
1.0
1 = Unlocked
2 = Locked
1.0
195
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
1.0
375 Communicator
Data Type/
Structure
Definition
Diagrams
Message
Type
Parameter Mnemonic
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Access
Initial Value
Store/Rate (HZ)
Resource block parameters continued
RB Reference
OD Index
Table C-1
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Access
Initial Value
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
Size
This alert is generated by
any change to the static
data.
RECORD
DS-73
1/4
D
-
R
1.0
BLOCK_ALM
The block alarm is used
for all configuration,
hardware, connection
failure or system problems
in the block. The cause of
the alert is entered in the
subcode field. The first
alert to become active will
set the Active status in the
Status attribute. As soon
as the Unreported status
is cleared by the alert
reporting task, another
block alert may be
reported without clearing
the Active status, if the
subcode has changed.
RECORD
DS-72
13
D
-
R/W
1.0
37
ALARM_SUM
The current alert status,
unacknowledged states,
unreported states, and
disabled states of the
alarms associated with the
function block.
RECORD
DS-74
8
mix
-
R/W
1.0
38
ACK_OPTION
Selection of whether
alarms associated with the
block will be automatically
acknowledged.
ENUM
Bit String
2
S
0
R/W
0 = Auto Ack Disabled
1 = Auto Ack Enabled
1.0
39
WRITE_PRI
Priority of the alarm
generated by clearing the
write lock.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
S
0
R/W
0 to 15
1.0
40
WRITE_ALM
This alert is generated if
the write lock parameter is
cleared.
RECORD
DS-72
1/3
D
-
R/W
1.0
41
ITK_VER
Major revision number of
the interoperability test
case used in certifying this
device as interoperable.
The format and range of
the version number is
defined and controlled by
the Fieldbus Foundation.
Note: The value of this
parameter will be zero (o)
if the device has not been
registered as
interoperable by the FF.
VARIABLE
Unsigned16
2
S
5
R
3.0
42
FD_VER
A parameter equal to the
value of the major version
of the Field Diagnostics
specification that this
device was designed to.
Unsigned16
2
S
-
RO
7.0
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
35
UPDATE_EVT
36
196
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Resource block parameters continued
Store/Rate (HZ)
OD Index
Table C-1
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
This parameter reflects
the error conditions that
are being detected as
active as selected for this
category. It is a bit string,
so that multiple conditions
may be shown.
Bit String
4
D
-
RO
0x00000001 = Check
Function
0x00000002 = Calibration
in Progress
0x00000008 = Sensor
Simulation Active
0x00000010 = Slug Flow
0x00000020 = Meter
Verification Aborted
0x00000040 = Meter
Verification Failed
0x00000080 =
Extrapolation Alert
0x00000100 = PM:
Temperature or Density
Overrange
0x00000200 = Drive
Overrange
0x00000400 = Data Loss
Possible (Totals)
0x00001000 = Calibration
Failure
0x00002000 = Transmitter
Not Characterized
0x00004000 = CM:
Unable to Fit Curve Data
0x00008000 =
Temperature Overrange
0x00010000 = No Left
Pickoff/Right Pickoff
Signal
0x00020000 = Density
Overrange
0x00040000 = Mass Flow
Overrange
0x00080000 = No Sensor
Response
0x00100000 = Low Power
0x00200000 = Sensor
Communication Failure
0x00400000 = NV
Memory Failure
0x00800000 = Transmitter
Initializing/Warming Up
0x01000000 = Electronics
Failure - Hornet
0x02000000 = Electronics
Failure - Device
0x04000000 = Factory
configuration invalid
0x08000000 = Factory
configuration checksum
invalid
7.0
FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE
This parameter reflects
the error conditions that
are being detected as
active as selected for this
category. It is a bit string,
so that multiple conditions
may be shown.
Bit String
4
D
-
RO
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
45
FD_MAINT_ACTIVE
This parameter reflects
the error conditions that
are being detected as
active as selected for this
category. It is a bit string,
so that multiple conditions
may be shown.
Bit String
4
D
-
RO
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
46
FD_CHECK_ACTIVE
This parameter reflects
the error conditions that
are being detected as
active as selected for this
category. It is a bit string,
so that multiple conditions
may be shown.
Bit String
4
D
-
RO
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
FD_FAIL_ACTIVE
44
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
375 Communicator
43
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Access
Initial Value
Size
Definition
Diagrams
Data Type/
Structure
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Store/Rate (HZ)
Resource block parameters continued
RB Reference
OD Index
Table C-1
197
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Size
This parameter maps
conditions to be detected
as active for this alarm
category. Thus the same
condition may be active in
all, some, or none of the 4
alarm categories.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
FD_OFFSPEC_MAP
This parameter maps
conditions to be detected
as active for this alarm
category. Thus the same
condition may be active in
all, some, or none of the 4
alarm categories.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
49
FD_MAINT_MAP
This parameter maps
conditions to be detected
as active for this alarm
category. Thus the same
condition may be active in
all, some, or none of the 4
alarm categories.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
50
FD_CHECK_MAP
This parameter maps
conditions to be detected
as active for this alarm
category. Thus the same
condition may be active in
all, some, or none of the 4
alarm categories.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
51
FD_FAIL_MASK
This parameter allows the
user to suppress any
single or multiple
conditions that are active,
in this category, from
being broadcast to the
host through the alarm
parameter. A bit equal to
‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the
broadcast of a condition,
and a bit equal to ‘0’ will
unmask i.e. allow
broadcast of a condition.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
52
FD_OFFSPEC_MASK
This parameter allows the
user to suppress any
single or multiple
conditions that are active,
in this category, from
being broadcast to the
host through the alarm
parameter. A bit equal to
‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the
broadcast of a condition,
and a bit equal to ‘0’ will
unmask i.e. allow
broadcast of a condition.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
53
FD_MAINT_MASK
This parameter allows the
user to suppress any
single or multiple
conditions that are active,
in this category, from
being broadcast to the
host through the alarm
parameter. A bit equal to
‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the
broadcast of a condition,
and a bit equal to ‘0’ will
unmask i.e. allow
broadcast of a condition.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
Definition
47
FD_FAIL_MAP
48
198
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Initial Value
Data Type/
Structure
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Access
Resource block parameters continued
Store/Rate (HZ)
OD Index
Table C-1
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Release
Access
Initial Value
This parameter allows the
user to suppress any
single or multiple
conditions that are active,
in this category, from
being broadcast to the
host through the alarm
parameter. A bit equal to
‘1’ will mask i.e. inhibit the
broadcast of a condition,
and a bit equal to ‘0’ will
unmask i.e. allow
broadcast of a condition.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
FD_FAIL_ALM
This parameter is used
primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated
active conditions, which
are not masked, for this
alarm category to a Host
System.
DS-87
15
D
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
56
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM
This parameter is used
primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated
active conditions, which
are not masked, for this
alarm category to a Host
System.
DS-87
15
D
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
57
FD_MAINT_ALM
This parameter is used
primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated
active conditions, which
are not masked, for this
alarm category to a Host
System.
DS-87
15
D
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
58
FD_CHECK_ALM
This parameter is used
primarily to broadcast a
change in the associated
active conditions, which
are not masked, for this
alarm category to a Host
System.
DS-87
15
D
-
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
59
FD_FAIL_PRI
This parameter allows the
user to specify the priority
of this alarm category.
Unsigned8
1
S
0
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
60
FD_OFFSPEC_PRI
This parameter allows the
user to specify the priority
of this alarm category.
Unsigned8
1
S
0
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
61
FD_MAINT_PRI
This parameter allows the
user to specify the priority
of this alarm category.
Unsigned8
1
S
0
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
62
FD_CHECK_PRI
This parameter allows the
user to specify the priority
of this alarm category.
Unsigned8
1
S
0
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
63
FD_SIMULATE
This parameter allows the
conditions to be manually
supplied when simulation
is enabled. When
simulation is disabled both
the diagnostic simulate
value and the diagnostic
value track the actual
conditions. The simulate
jumper is required for
simulation to be enabled
and while simulation is
enabled the
recommended action will
show that simulation is
active.
DS-89
9
D
disab
led
RW
(OS/
AUTO)
7.0
54
FD_CHECK_MASK
55
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
Enumerated List of
Values
375 Communicator
Size
Definition
Diagrams
Data Type/
Structure
Parameter Mnemonic
Message
Type
Store/Rate (HZ)
Resource block parameters continued
RB Reference
OD Index
Table C-1
199
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Access
Initial Value
Data Type/
Structure
Size
Unsigned16
2
D
0
RO
Same as OD Index 77
7.0
FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE An optional parameter or
parameters to allow the
user finer detail on
conditions causing an
active condition in the
FD_*_ACTIVE
parameters.
Bit String
4
D
-
RO
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
66
FD_EXTENDED_MAP
An optional parameter or
parameters to allow the
user finer control on
enabling conditions
contributing to the
conditions in
FD_*_ACTIVE
parameters.
Bit String
4
S
-
RW
Same as OD Index 43
7.0
67
COMPATIBILITY_REV
This parameter is used
when replacing field
devices. The correct value
of this parameter is the
DEV_REV value of the
replaced device.
unsigned8
4
D
68
HARDWARE_REVISION
Hardware revision of that
hardware
unsigned8
1
S
69
SOFTWARE_REV
Software revision of
source code which has
resource block in it.
Visible
String
32
70
PD_TAG
PD tag description of
device
Visible
String
71
DEV_STRING
This is used to load new
licensing into the device.
The value can be written
but will always read back
with a value of 0.
72
DEV_OPTIONS
Indicates which
miscellaneous device
licensing options are
enabled.
73
OUTPUT_BOARD_SN
Output board serial
number.
74
FINAL_ASSY_NUM
75
76
Parameter Mnemonic
Definition
64
FD_RECOMMEN_ACT
This parameter is a device
enumerated
summarization of the most
severe condition or
conditions detected. The
DD help should describe
by enumerated action,
what should be done to
alleviate the condition or
conditions. 0 is defined as
Not Initialized, 1 is defined
as No Action Required, all
others defined by manuf.
65
Message
Type
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Resource block parameters continued
Store/Rate (HZ)
OD Index
Table C-1
EPM Parameters
200
R
7.0
Set
on
Build
R
7.0
S
Set
on
Build
R
7.0
32
S
Copy
of
MIB
PD_
TAG
R
7.0
Array of
unsigned32
32
S
0
R/W
1.0
bit string
4
S
VARIABLE
unsigned32
4
S
0
R
1.0
The same final assembly
number placed on the
neck label.
VARIABLE
unsigned32
4
S
0
R/W
1.0
DOWNLOAD_MODE
Gives access to the boot
block code for over the
wire downloads
ENUM
unsigned8
1
S
0
R
1.0
HEALTH_INDEX
Parameter representing
the overall health of the
device, 100 being perfect.
VARIABLE
Unsigned8
1
D
-
R
VARIABLE
VARIABLE
R/W
0x00000001 = Download
1 - 100
7.0
3.0
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Designates the alarming
priority of the
FAILED_ALM and also
used as switch b/w FD
and legacy PWA. If value
is greater than or equal to
1 then PWA alerts will be
active in device else
device will have FD alerts.
VARIABLE
unsigned8
1
S
0
R/W
0 - 15
Enumerated list of
recommended actions
displayed with a device
alert.
VARIABLE
unsigned16
2
D
-
R
0 = Uninitialized
1 = No action
6 = Factory configuration
checksum invalid
7 = Factory configuration
invalid
8 = Electronics Failure Device
9 = Replace the Fieldbus
Electronics Module
Assembly
10 = Transmitter
Initializing/Warming Up
11 = Reset the Device
then Download the Device
Configuration
12 = Sensor
Communication Failure
13 = Low Power
14 = No Sensor Response
15 = Mass Flow
Overrange
16 = Density Overrange
17 = No Left Pickoff/Right
Pickoff Signal
18 = Temperature
Overrange
19 = CM: Unable to Fit
Curve Data
20 = Transmitter Not
Characterized
21 = Calibration Failure
23 = Data Loss Possible
(Totals)
24 = Drive Overrange
25 = PM: Temperature or
Density Overrange
26 = Extrapolation Alert
27 = Meter Verification
Failed
28 = Meter Verification
Aborted
29 = Slug Flow
30 = Sensor Simulation
Active
32 = Allow the procedure
to complete
33 = Check Transducer
Block Mode
34 = Simulation Active
39 = Simulated -- Factory
configuration checksum
invalid
40 = Simulated -- Factory
configuration invalid
41 = Simulated -Electronics Failure Device
42 = Simulated -- Replace
the Fieldbus Electronics
Module Assembly
43 = Simulated -Transmitter
Initializing/Warming Up
44 = Simulated -- Reset
the Device then Download
the Device Configuration
45 = Simulated -- Sensor
Communication Failure
46 = Simulated -- Low
Power
47 = Simulated -- No
Sensor Response
77
FAILED_PRI
78
RECOMMENDED_ACTI
ON
Configuration and Use Manual
Enumerated List of
Values
3.0
ProLink
Size
375 Communicator
Data Type/
Structure
Definition
Diagrams
Message
Type
Parameter Mnemonic
Release
Access
Initial Value
Store/Rate (HZ)
Resource block parameters continued
RB Reference
OD Index
Table C-1
201
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Message
Type
Data Type/
Structure
Size
Access
Definition
Initial Value
Parameter Mnemonic
Enumerated List of
Values
48 = Simulated -- Mass
Flow Overrange
49 = Simulated -- Density
Overrange+
50 = Simulated -- No Left
Pickoff/Right Pickoff
Signal
51 = Simulated -Temperature Overrange
52 = Simulated -- CM:
Unable to Fit Curve Data
53 = Simulated -Transmitter Not
Characterized
54 = Simulated -Calibration Failure
56 = Simulated -- Data
Loss Possible (Totals)
57 = Simulated -- Drive
Overrange
58 = Simulated -- PM:
Temperature or Density
Overrange
59 = Simulated -Extrapolation Alert
60 = Simulated -- Meter
Verification Failed
61 = Simulated -- Meter
Verification Aborted
62 = Simulated -- Slug
Flow
63 = Simulated -- Sensor
Simulation Active
65 = Simulated -- Allow
the procedure to complete
66 = Simulated -- Check
Transducer Block Mode
Release
Resource block parameters continued
Store/Rate (HZ)
OD Index
Table C-1
3.0
79
FAILED_ALM
Alarm indicating a failure
within a device which
makes the device
non-operational.
RECORD
DS-71
13
D
-
R/W
3.0
80
MAINT _ALM
Alarm indicating the
device needs
maintenance soon. If the
condition is ignored, the
device will eventually fail.
RECORD
DS-71
13
D
-
R/W
3.0
81
ADVISE _ALM
Alarm indicating advisory
alarms. These conditions
do not have a direct
impact on the process or
device integrity.
RECORD
DS-71
13
D
-
R/W
3.0
82
FAILED_ENABLE
Enabled FAILED_ALM
alarm conditions.
Corresponds bit for bit to
the FAILED_ACTIVE.A bit
on means that the
corresponding alarm
condition is enabled and
will be detected. A bit off
means the corresponding
alarm condition is disabled
and will not be detected.
ENUM
bit string
4
S
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
83
FAILED_MASK
Mask of Failure Alarm.
Corresponds bit for bit to
the FAILED_ACTIVE. A
bit on means that the
failure is masked out from
alarming.
ENUM
bit string
4
S
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
84
FAILED_ACTIVE
Enumerated list of
advisory conditions within
a device. All open bits are
free to be used as
appropriate for each
specific device.
ENUM
bit string
4
D
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
85
MAINT_PRI
Designates the alarming
priority of the
MAINT_ALM.
VARIABLE
unsigned8
1
S
0
R/W
0 - 15
3.0
202
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Data Type/
Structure
Size
Enabled MAINT_ALM
alarm conditions.
Corresponds bit for bit to
the MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit
on means that the
corresponding alarm
condition is enabled and
will be detected. A bit off
means the corresponding
alarm condition is disabled
and will not be detected.
ENUM
bit string
4
S
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
MAINT _MASK
Mask of Maintenance
Alarm. Corresponds bit for
bit to the MAINT_ACTIVE.
A bit on means that the
failure is masked out from
alarming.
ENUM
bit string
4
S
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
88
MAINT _ACTIVE
Enumerated list of
advisory conditions within
a device. All open bits are
free to be used as
appropriate for each
specific device
ENUM
bit string
4
D
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
89
ADVISE_PRI
Designates the alarming
priority of the
ADVISE_ALM.
VARIABLE
unsigned8
1
S
0
R/W
0 - 15
3.0
90
ADVISE_ENABLE
Enabled ADVISE_ALM
alarm conditions.
Corresponds bit for bit to
the ADVISE_ACTIVE. A
bit on means that the
corresponding alarm
condition is enabled and
will be detected. A bit off
means the corresponding
alarm condition is disabled
and will not be detected.
ENUM
bit string
4
S
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
91
ADVISE _MASK
ENUM
Mask of Advisory
Alarm.Corresponds bit for
bit to the
ADVISE_ACTIVE. A bit on
means that the failure is
masked out from alarming.
bit string
4
S
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
92
ADVISE _ACTIVE
Enumerated list of
advisory conditions within
a device. All open bits are
free to be used as
appropriate for each
specific device
ENUM
bit string
4
D
0
R
Same as OD Index 43
3.0
Definition
86
MAINT_ENABLE
87
Diagrams
Message
Type
Parameter Mnemonic
Enumerated List of
Values
Release
Access
Initial Value
Store/Rate (HZ)
Resource block parameters continued
RB Reference
OD Index
Table C-1
375 Communicator
(1) The initial value is based on transmitter software version 4.0. If the transmitter contains a later version of software, the initial value
may be different.
C.2
Resource block views
Table C-2 lists the views for the resource block. The Fieldbus Foundation defines the views as:
View 1 – View object defined to access the dynamic operating parameters of a block
•
View 2 – View object defined to access the static operating parameters of a block.
•
View 3 – View object defined to access all the dynamic parameters of a block.
•
View 4 – View object defined to access static parameters not included in View 2.
ProLink
•
The number in the cell represents the size of the parameter in bytes. Each view can only contain a
total of 122 bytes of data. Each view must start with ST_REV.
Configuration and Use Manual
203
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Table C-2
204
Resource block views
OD
Index
Parameter Mnemonic
1
ST_REV
2
TAG_DESC
3
STRATEGY
4
ALERT_KEY
5
MODE_BLK
4
4
6
BLOCK_ERR
2
2
7
RS_STATE
1
1
8
TEST_RW
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 3_1
View 4
View 4_1
View 4_2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
9
DD_RESOURCE
10
MANUFAC_ID
4
11
DEV_TYPE
2
12
DEV_REV
1
13
DD_REV
1
14
GRANT_DENY
15
HARD_TYPES
16
RESTART
17
FEATURES
18
FEATURE_SEL
19
CYCLE_TYPE
20
CYCLE_SEL
21
MIN_CYCLE_T
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
22
MEMORY_SIZE
23
NV_CYCLE_T
4
24
FREE_SPACE
4
25
FREE_TIME
26
SHED_RCAS
27
SHED_ROUT
28
FAULT_STATE
29
SET_FSTATE
30
CLR_FSTATE
2
4
4
4
4
1
1
31
MAX_NOTIFY
32
LIM_NOTIFY
33
CONFIRM_TIME
4
34
WRITE_LOCK
1
35
UPDATE_EVT
36
BLOCK_ALM
37
ALARM_SUM
1
1
8
8
38
ACK_OPTION
2
39
WRITE_PRI
1
40
WRITE_ALM
41
ITK_VER
2
42
FD_VER
2
43
FD_FAIL_ACTIVE
4
4
44
FD_OFFSPEC_ACTIVE
4
4
45
FD_MAINT_ACTIVE
4
4
46
FD_CHECK_ACTIVE
4
4
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
Table C-2
Resource block views continued
Parameter Mnemonic
47
FD_FAIL_MAP
4
48
FD_OFFSPEC_MAP
4
49
FD_MAINT_MAP
4
50
FD_CHECK_MAP
4
51
FD_FAIL_MASK
4
52
FD_OFFSPEC_MASK
4
53
FD_MAINT_MASK
4
54
FD_CHECK_MASK
4
55
FD_FAIL_ALM
View 1
View 2
View 3
View 3_1
View 4
FD_OFFSPEC_ALM
57
FD_MAINT_ALM
58
FD_CHECK_ALM
59
FD_FAIL_PRI
1
60
FD_OFFSPEC_PRI
1
61
FD_MAINT_PRI
1
62
FD_CHECK_PRI
63
FD_SIMULATE
1
9
64
FD_RECOMMEN_ACT
2
2
65
FD_EXTENDED_ACTIVE
4
4
66
FD_EXTENDED_MAP
67
COMPATIBILITY_REV
68
HARDWARE_REVISION
4
SOFTWARE_REV
70
PD_TAG
32
71
DEV_STRING
32
72
DEV_OPTIONS
4
73
OUTPUT_BOARD_SN
4
74
FINAL_ASSY_NUM
4
DOWNLOAD_MODE
76
HEALTH_INDEX
77
FAILED_PRI
78
RECOMMENDED_ACTION
79
FAILED_ALM
80
MAINT _ALM
1
1
2
81
ADVISE _ALM
82
FAILED_ENABLE
83
FAILED_MASK
84
FAILED_ACTIVE
85
MAINT_PRI
1
86
MAINT_ENABLE
4
87
MAINT _MASK
4
88
MAINT _ACTIVE
89
ADVISE_PRI
1
90
ADVISE_ENABLE
4
91
ADVISE _MASK
92
ADVISE _ACTIVE
Configuration and Use Manual
4
4
4
ProLink
Totals
375 Communicator
69
75
View 4_2
Diagrams
56
View 4_1
RB Reference
OD
Index
4
4
4
44
30
54
16
73
78
29
205
Model 2700 Resource Block Reference
206
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
D.1
RB Reference
Appendix D
Flowmeter installation types and components
Installation diagrams
Model 2700 transmitters can be installed in four different ways:
Integral
•
4-wire remote
•
9-wire remote
•
Remote core processor with remote transmitter
Diagrams
•
See Figure D-1.
D.2
Component diagrams
Figure D-2 shows the transmitter and core processor components in integral installations.
Figure D-3 shows the transmitter components in 4-wire remote installations and remote core
processor with remote transmitter installations.
Figure D-4 shows the transmitter/core processor assembly in 9-wire remote installations.
In remote core processor with remote transmitter installations, the core processor is installed
stand-alone. See Figure D-5.
Wiring and terminal diagrams
In 4-wire remote and remote core processor with remote transmitter installations, a 4-wire cable is
used to connect the core processor to the transmitter’s mating connector. See Figure D-6.
In 9-wire remote installations, a 9-wire cable is used to connect the junction box on the sensor to the
terminals on the transmitter/core processor assembly. See Figure D-8.
375 Communicator
D.3
Figure D-9 shows the transmitter’s power supply terminals.
Figure D-9 shows the output terminals for the Model 2700 transmitter.
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
207
Flowmeter installation types and components
Figure D-1
Installation types
Transmitter
Integral
Core processor
(standard only)
Sensor
4-wire remote
Transmitter
Sensor
4-wire cable
Core processor
(standard or enhanced)
Transmitter
9-wire remote
Sensor
Core processor
(standard only)
9-wire cable
Junction box
Transmitter
Remote core processor with
remote transmitter
4-wire cable
Sensor
Core processor
(standard only)
Junction box
208
9-wire cable
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Flowmeter installation types and components
Figure D-2
Transmitter and core processor components – Integral installations
RB Reference
Transmitter
Transition ring
Core processor
4 X Cap screws (4 mm)
Base
Sensor
Transmitter components, junction end-cap removed – 4-wire remote and remote core processor
with remote transmitter installations
Diagrams
Figure D-3
–
Ground lug
Main enclosure
Conduit opening
for 4-wire cable
Mounting bracket
375 Communicator
Junction housing
4 X Cap screws
(4 mm)
Junction end-cap
Mating connector
socket
Mating connector
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
209
Flowmeter installation types and components
Figure D-4
Transmitter/core processor assembly exploded view – 9-wire remote installations
Transmitter
Core processor
4 X Cap screws (4 mm)
Core processor housing
Conduit opening
for 9-wire cable
End-cap
Mounting bracket
Figure D-5
Remote core processor components
Core processor lid
4 X Cap screws (4 mm)
Conduit opening
for 4-wire cable
Conduit opening
for 9-wire cable
Mounting bracket
210
Core processor housing
End-cap
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Flowmeter installation types and components
Figure D-6
4-wire cable between Model 2700 transmitter and standard core processor
User-supplied or
factory-supplied 4-wire cable
RB Reference
Core processor
terminals
Mating connector
(transmitter)
VDC+ (Red)
RS-485/B (Green)
RS-485/A (White)
Figure D-7
Diagrams
VDC– (Black)
4-wire cable between Model 2700 transmitter and enhanced core processor
Core processor
terminals
User-supplied or
factory-supplied 4-wire cable
Mating connector
(transmitter)
RS-485/A (White)
RS-485/B (Green)
375 Communicator
VDC– (Black)
VDC+ (Red)
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
211
Flowmeter installation types and components
Figure D-8
9-wire cable between sensor junction box and core processor
9-wire cable
9-wire terminal connections
(core processor)
Ground screw
Black
(Drains from all
wire sets)
to sensor junction box
Green
White
Black
Brown
Violet
Yellow
Red
Green
White
Brown
Red
Blue
Gray
Orange
Violet
Yellow
Plug and
socket
Blue
Gray
Orange
Mounting
screw
Figure D-9
Output and power supply terminals
Fieldbus terminals
1
2
9 (–, N)
10 (+, L)
Equipment
ground
7
8
Service port
212
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
2.1
RB Reference
Appendix 2
Connecting with the Field Communicator
Overview
The Field Communicator is a handheld configuration and management tool for FOUNDATION
fieldbus-compatible devices, including the Micro Motion Model 2700 transmitter. This appendix
provides basic information for connecting the Field Communicator to your transmitter.
The instructions in this manual assume that users are already familiar with the Communicator and can
perform the following tasks:
Turn on the Communicator
•
Navigate the Communicator menus
•
Transmit and receive configuration information between the Communicator and FOUNDATION
fieldbus-compatible devices
•
Use the alpha keys to type information
Diagrams
•
If you are unable to perform the tasks listed above, consult the Communicator manual before
attempting to use the Communicator. The documentation is available on the Micro Motion web site
(www.micromotion.com).
Note: In this manual, procedures identified as performed with a fieldbus host can be accomplished
with a Field Communicator.
Viewing the device descriptions
To access all of the features of the Model 2700 transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus, the Field
Communicator must have the correct device description (DD). DD files are available in the Products
section of the Micro Motion web site (www.micromotion.com).
To view the Model 2700 device descriptions that are installed on your Field Communicator:
375 Communicator
2.2
1. In the Foundation fieldbus application menu, choose Utility, then Available Device
Descriptions List.
2. Expand the Micro Motion, Inc. branch, then expand the 2000 branch.
3. If you do not have a Dev Rev 6 device description installed, you will need to obtain it in order
to use the functionality described in this manual. Contact Micro Motion.
2.3
Connecting to a transmitter
Configuration and Use Manual
ProLink
The Field Communicator can be connected directly to a fieldbus segment. Figures 2-1 and 2-2
illustrate two examples for connecting the Communicator to a segment.
213
Connecting with the Field Communicator
Figure 2-1
Bench connection example
Transmitter
Fieldbus power
conditioner
Connection
block
+
–
+–
+
+
+
–
–
–
Terminator
Terminator
24 VDC power
supply
Communicator
Figure 2-2
Field connection example
Transmitters
Fieldbus power
conditioner
Fieldbus junction
box
+
–
Terminator
Fieldbus host
control system
24 VDC power
supply
214
Terminator
Communicator
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
3.1
RB Reference
Appendix 3
Connecting with ProLink II
Overview
ProLink II is a Windows-based configuration and management tool for Micro Motion transmitters. It
provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
This chapter provides basic information for connecting ProLink II to your transmitter. The following
topics and procedures are discussed:
Requirements (see Section 3.2)
•
Configuration upload/download (see Section 3.3)
•
Connecting to a Model 2700 transmitter (see Section 3.4)
Diagrams
•
The instructions in this manual assume that users are already familiar with ProLink software. For
more information on using ProLink, see the ProLink User manual.
3.2
Requirements
To use ProLink II with a Model 2700 transmitter, you will need:
An RS-485 to RS-232 signal converter, to convert the PC port’s signal to the signal used by the
transmitter. For computers without serial ports, certain USB to RS-232 converters can be used
in conjunction with the RS-232 to RS-485 converter. Both types of converter are available
from Micro Motion.
•
25-pin to 9-pin adapter (if required by your PC)
Note: If you are using the enhanced core processor and you connect directly to the core processor’s
RS-485 terminals (see Appendix D) instead of to the transmitter, ProLink II v2.4 or later is required.
This connection type is sometimes used for troubleshooting.
3.3
375 Communicator
•
ProLink II configuration upload/download
ProLink II provides a configuration upload/download function which allows you to save configuration
sets to your PC. This allows:
•
Easy backup and restore of transmitter configuration
•
Easy replication of configuration sets
Micro Motion recommends that all transmitter configurations be downloaded to a PC as soon as the
configuration is complete.
ProLink
To access the configuration upload/download function:
1. Connect ProLink II to your transmitter as described in this chapter.
Configuration and Use Manual
215
Connecting with ProLink II
2. From the File menu:
3.4
•
To save a configuration file to a PC, use the Load from Xmtr to File option.
•
To restore or load a configuration file to a transmitter, use the Send to Xmtr from File
option.
Connecting from a PC to a Model 2700 transmitter
You can temporarily connect a PC to the transmitter’s service port. The service port is located within
the transmitter wiring compartment, beneath the intrinsic safety cover.
Figure 3-1
Service port
Intrinsic safety cover
Service port (7,8)
3.4.1
Connecting to the service port
To temporarily connect to the service port, which is located in the non-intrinsically safe power-supply
compartment:
1. Attach the signal converter to the serial or USB port of your PC, using a 25-pin to 9-pin
adapter if required.
2. Open the cover to the intrinsically safe wiring compartment.
WARNING
Opening the wiring compartment in a hazardous area can cause an
explosion.
Because the wiring compartment must be open to make this connection, the
service port should be used only for temporary connections, for example, for
configuration or troubleshooting purposes.
When the transmitter is in an explosive atmosphere, do not use the service port
to connect to the transmitter.
3. Open the power supply compartment.
216
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Connecting with ProLink II
WARNING
RB Reference
Opening the power supply compartment can expose the operator to
electric shock.
To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not touch the power supply wires or
terminals while using the service port.
4. Connect the signal converter leads to the service port terminals.
Figure 3-2
Connecting to the service port
Diagrams
RS-485B
RS-485A
Service port
25 to 9 pin serial port
adapter (if necessary)
RS-485 to RS-232
signal converter
•
Protocol: Service Port
•
COM Port: as appropriate for your PC
375 Communicator
5. Start ProLink II. Choose Connection > Connect to Device. In the screen that appears,
specify:
All other parameters are set to service port required values and cannot be changed.
6. Click Connect.
7. If an error message appears:
a. Swap the leads between the two service port terminals and try again.
b. Ensure that you are using the correct COM port.
c. Check all the wiring between the PC and the transmitter.
ProLink
Configuration and Use Manual
217
Connecting with ProLink II
3.5
ProLink II language
ProLink II can be configured for the following languages:
•
English
•
French
•
German
To configure the ProLink II language, choose Tools > Options. In this manual, English is used as the
ProLink II language.
218
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
4.1
Display
Appendix 4
Using the display
Overview
This appendix describes the basic use of the display and provides a menu tree for the display. You can
use the menu tree to locate and perform display commands quickly.
4.2
Components
Figure 4-1 illustrates the display components.
Figure 4-1
Display components
Current value
Process variable line
Indicator light
Scroll optical switch
4.3
Units of
measure
Select optical switch
Using the optical switches
The Scroll and Select optical switches are used to navigate the display menus. To activate an optical
switch, touch the lens in front of the optical switch or move your finger over the optical switch close
to the lens. There are two optical switch indicators: one for each switch. When an optical switch is
activated, the associated optical switch indicator is a solid red.
Configuration and Use Manual
219
NE53 History
Note that Model 2700 transmitters can be ordered with or without displays. Not all configuration and
use functions are available through the display. If you need the added functionality, or if your
transmitter does not have a display, you must use either a fieldbus host or ProLink II.
Using the display
CAUTION
Attempting to activate an optical switch by inserting an object into the
opening can damage the equipment.
To avoid damage to the optical switches, do not insert an object into the openings.
Use your fingers to activate the optical switches.
4.4
Using the display
The display can be used to view process variable data or to access the transmitter menus for
configuration or maintenance.
4.4.1
Display language
The display can be configured for the following languages:
•
English
•
French
•
Spanish
•
German
Due to software and hardware restrictions, some English words and terms may appear in the
non-English display menus. For a list of the codes and abbreviations used on the display, see
Table 4-1.
For information on configuring the display language, see Section 4.18.6.
In this manual, English is used as the display language.
4.4.2
Viewing process variables
In ordinary use, the Process variable line on the LCD panel shows the configured display variables,
and the Units of measure line shows the measurement unit for that process variable.
•
See Section 4.18.5 for information on configuring the display variables.
•
See Table 4-1 for information on the codes and abbreviations used for display variables.
If more than one line is required to describe the display variable, the Units of measure line alternates
between the measurement unit and the additional description. For example, if the LCD panel is
displaying a mass inventory value, the Units of measure line alternates between the measurement
unit (for example, G) and the name of the inventory (for example, MASSI).
Auto Scroll may or may not be enabled:
•
If Auto Scroll is enabled, each configured display variable will be shown for the number of
seconds specified for Scroll Rate.
•
Whether Auto Scroll is enabled or not, the operator can manually scroll through the configured
display variables by activating Scroll.
For more information on using the display to manage totalizers and inventories, see Chapter 5.
220
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Using the display
4.4.3
Using display menus
Display
Note: The display menu system provides access to basic transmitter functions and data. It does not
provide access to all functions and data. To access all functions and data, use a fieldbus host or
ProLink II
To enter the display menu system:
1. Activate Scroll and Select simultaneously.
2. Hold Scroll and Select until the words SEE ALARM or OFF-LINE MAINT appear.
Note: Access to the display menu system may be enabled or disabled. If disabled, the OFF-LINE
MAINT option does not appear. For more information, see Section 4.18.1.
If no optical switch activity occurs for two minutes, the transmitter will exit the off-line menu system
and return to the process variable display.
To move through a list of options, activate Scroll.
•
To confirm the change, activate Select.
•
To cancel the change, activate Scroll.
To exit a menu without making any changes:
•
Use the EXIT option if available.
•
Otherwise, activate Scroll at the confirmation screen.
4.4.4
Display password
A password can be used to control access to either the off-line maintenance menu, the alarm menu, or
both. The same code is used for both:
•
If both passwords are enabled, the user must enter the password to access the top-level off-line
menu. The user can then access either the alarm menu or the off-line maintenance menu
without re-entering the password.
•
If only one password is enabled, the user can access the top-level off-line menu, but will be
prompted for the password when he or she attempts to access the alarm menu or the off-line
maintenance menu (depending on which password is enabled). The user can access the other
menu without a password.
•
If neither password is enabled, the user can access all parts of the off-line menu without a
password.
For information about enabling and setting the display password, refer to Section 4.18.
Note: If the petroleum measurement application is installed on your transmitter, the display password
is always required to start, stop, or reset a totalizer, even if neither password is enabled. If the
petroleum measurement application is not installed, the display password is never required for these
functions, even if one of the passwords is enabled.
If a password is required, the word CODE? appears at the top of the password screen. Enter the digits
of the password one at a time by using Scroll to choose a number and Select to move to the next
digit.
If you encounter the display password screen but do not know the password, wait 30 seconds without
activating any of the display optical switches. The password screen will timeout automatically and
you will be returned to the previous screen.
Configuration and Use Manual
221
NE53 History
To select from a list or to enter a lower-level menu, scroll to the desired option, then activate Select. If
a confirmation screen is displayed:
Using the display
4.4.5
Entering floating-point values with the display
Certain configuration values, such as meter factors or output ranges, are entered as floating-point
values. When you first enter the configuration screen, the value is displayed in decimal notation (as
shown in Figure 4-2) and the active digit is flashing.
Figure 4-2
Numeric values in decimal notation
SX.XXXX
Sign
For positive numbers, leave this space
blank. For negative numbers, enter a
minus sign (–).
Digits
Enter a number (maximum length: eight
digits, or seven digits and a minus sign).
Maximum precision is four.
To change the value:
1. Select to move one digit to the left. From the leftmost digit, a space is provided for a sign. The
sign space wraps back to the rightmost digit.
2. Scroll to change the value of the active digit: 1 becomes 2, 2 becomes 3, ..., 9 becomes 0, 0
becomes 1. For the rightmost digit, an E option is included to switch to exponential notation.
To change the sign of a value:
1. Select to move to the space that is immediately left of the leftmost digit.
2. Use Scroll to specify – (for a negative value) or [blank] (for a positive value).
In decimal notation, you can change the position of the decimal point up to a maximum precision of
four (four digits to the right of the decimal point). To do this:
1. Select until the decimal point is flashing.
2. Scroll. This removes the decimal point and moves the cursor one digit to the left.
3. Select to move one digit to the left. As you move from one digit to the next, a decimal point
will flash between each digit pair.
4. When the decimal point is in the desired position, Scroll. This inserts the decimal point and
moves the cursor one digit to the left.
To change from decimal to exponential notation (see Figure 4-3):
1. Select until the rightmost digit is flashing.
2. Scroll to E, then Select. The display changes to provide two spaces for entering the exponent.
3. To enter the exponent:
a. Select until the desired digit is flashing.
b. Scroll to the desired value. You can enter a minus sign (first position only), values
between 0 and 3 (for the first position in the exponent), or values between 0 and 9 (for the
second position in the exponent).
c. Select.
Note: When switching between decimal and exponential notation, any unsaved edits are lost. The
system reverts to the previously saved value.
Note: While in exponential notation, the positions of the decimal point and exponent are fixed.
222
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Using the display
Figure 4-3
Numeric values in exponential notation
Sign
Display
SX.XXXEYY
Digit (0–9)
Digits
Enter a four-digit
Sign or Digit (0–3)
number; three digits
must fall to the right E
of the decimal point. Exponent
indicator
To change from exponential to decimal notation:
NE53 History
1. Select until the E is flashing.
2. Scroll to d.
3. Select. The display changes to remove the exponent.
To exit the menu:
•
•
If the value has been changed, Select and Scroll simultaneously until the confirmation screen
is displayed.
-
Select to apply the change and exit.
-
Scroll to exit without applying the change.
If the value has not been changed, Select and Scroll simultaneously until the previous screen
is displayed.
Configuration and Use Manual
223
Using the display
4.5
Abbreviations
The display uses a number of abbreviations. Table 4-1 lists the abbreviations used by the display.
Table 4-1
Display codes and abbreviations
Abbreviation
Definition
Abbreviation
Definition
ACK ALARM
Acknowledge alarm
LPO_A
Left pickoff amplitude
ACK ALL
Acknowledge all alarms
LVOLI
Volume inventory
ADDR
Address
LZERO
Live zero flow
AUTO SCRLL
Auto scroll
MAINT
Maintenance
AVE_D
Average density
MASS
Mass flow
AVE_T
Average temperature
MASSI
Mass inventory
BRD_T
Board temperature
MFLOW
Mass flow
BKLT
Backlight
MSMT
Measurement
CAL
Calibrate
MTR F
Meter factor
CHANGE CODE
Change display password
MTR_T
Case temperature (T-Series only)
CODE
Display password
NET M
CM net mass flow rate
CONC
Concentration
NET V
CM net volume flow rate
CONFG
Configure (or configuration)
NETMI
CM net mass inventory
CORE
Core processor
NETVI
CM net volume inventory
CUR Z
Current zero
OFFLN
Offline
DENS
Density
PASSW
Password
DGAIN
Drive gain
PRESS
Pressure
DISBL
Disable
PWRIN
Input voltage
DRIVE%
Drive gain
r.
Revision
DSPLY
Display
RDENS
Density at reference temperature
ENABL
Enable
RPO_A
Right pickoff amplitude
ENABLE ACK
Enable the ACK ALL function
SGU
Specific gravity units
ENABLE ALARM
Enable the alarm menu
SIM
Simulated
ENABLE AUTO
Enable auto scroll
SPECL
Special
ENABLE OFFLN
Enable the offline menu
STD M
Standard mass flow rate
ENABLE PASSW
Enable the display password
STD V
Standard volume flow rate
ENABLE RESET
Enable resetting of totals
STDVI
Standard volume inventory
ENABLE START
Enable stopping/starting of totals
TCDENS
Temperature-corrected density
EXT_P
External pressure
TCORI
Temperature-corrected inventory
EXT_T
External temperature
TCORR
Temperature-corrected total
EXTRN
External
TCVOL
Temperature-corrected volume
FAC Z
Factory zero
TEMPR
Temperature
FCF
Flow calibration factor
TUBEF
Raw tube frequency
FLDIR
Flow direction
VER
Version
GSV
Gas standard volume
VERFY
Verify
GSV F
Gas standard volume flow
VFLOW
Volume flow
GSV I
Gas standard volume inventory
VOL
Volume flow
GSV T
Gas standard volume total
WRPRO
Write protect
INTERN
Internal
WTAVE
Weighted average
LANG
Language
XMTR
Transmitter
LOCK
Write protect
224
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Display
Appendix 5
NE53 history
This appendix documents the change history of the Model 2700 transmitter with FOUNDATION
fieldbus software.
5.1
Software change history
NE53 History
Operating instructions are English versions. Instructions in other languages have different part
numbers but matching revision letters.
Table 5-1. Software version 1.0
Date
Changes to software
Operating
instructions
09/2000
Initial product release
20000326 Rev. A
Table 5-2. Software version 2.0
Date
Changes to software
06/2001
Software expansion:
• Support to configure the process variable units for mass flow, volume flow, density and
temperature from the display.
Operating
instructions
20000326 Rev. B
Software adjustment:
• Clarified the interaction of the digital fault setting and the last measured value timeout.
Feature additions:
• Backup link active scheduler (LAS)
• PID function block
• Analog output function block for pressure compensation
• Support for pressure compensation to the transducer block
• Drive gain as a selectable channel for AI blocks
• Ability to enable fieldbus simulate mode through the service port
Table 5-3. Software version 2.2
Date
Changes to software
02/2002
Software adjustments:
• Improved handling of RS-485 communication via the service port
• Improved display
Operating
instructions
20000326 Rev. C
Feature additions:
• Protections against low power conditions
Configuration and Use Manual
225
NE53 history
Table 5-4. Software version 3.x
Operating
instructions
Date
Changes to software
07/2004
Software expansions:
• Software version information available via the display or Modbus
• Totalizers can be disabled in addition to start/stop
• Doubled the number of virtual communication relationships (VCRs)
20000326 Rev. D
Software adjustments:
• Improved handling of AI block status when slug flow is detected
• Some fieldbus parameters made persistent across power resets
• Introduced finer-grained control over operator access to display functions
Feature additions:
• Petroleum measurement application
• Gas standard volume functionality
• Enhanced density application
• Support for enabling fieldbus simulation mode via the display
• Support for 32-character tagnames configurable via Modbus
• Support for Analog Input Block configurable via Modbus
Table 5-5. Software version 4.0
Operating
instructions
Date
Changes to software
06/2007
Software expansions:
• Temperature and density units added to API transducer block
• Additional configuration ability for the display
20000326 Rev. E
Feature additions:
• Configurable alarm severity
• Additional support for gas standard volume functionality
• Meter verification as an option
• Multiple display language selections
• PlantWeb Alerts II
• Ability to enable simulate mode through the Device Information Transducer Block
• Default value for AI1 block: mass flow in g/s
• Default value for AI2 block: temperature in °C
• Default value for AI3 block: density in g/cm3
• Default value for AI4 block: volume flow in l/s
Table 5-6. Software version 5.0
Operating
instructions
Date
Changes to software
01/2008
Software adjustments:
• Improved handling of Gas Standard Volume cutoffs
• Improved local display functionality for API and concentration measurement variables
20000326 Rev. EA
Feature additions:
• Support for Meter Verification AMS Snap-On
• Extra security for local display off-line menu access
226
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
NE53 history
Table 5-7. Software version 5.1
Changes to software
03/2009
Software adjustments:
• Resolved non-volatile memory (NVM) reliability issue present in version 4.0 and 5.0
software
Operating
instructions
20000326 Rev. EA
Display
Date
Table 5-8. Software version 6.0
Changes to software
06/2010
Software adjustments:
• Smart Meter Verification
• Improved representation of gas volume on local display
• Harmonized behavior of gas volume density parameter with other gas
• standard volume parameters
Configuration and Use Manual
Operating
instructions
20000326 Rev. EA
NE53 History
Date
227
Table 5-9. Software version 7.0
Operating
instructions
Date
Changes to software
01/2013
Software adjustments:
• Release of new firmware and hardware for MVD 2700 transmitter with Foundation
Fieldbus tested for ITK6.0.1. The version of new firmware is 7.00 and hardware
revision is ‘AA’.
20020223 Rev. AA
Feature additions:
• Two Analog Output (AO) function blocks. One AO block can be assigned to Pressure
Compensation Variable Channel where as other AO block can be assigned to any of
the Transducer Block Compensation Variable Channels
• One Discrete Input (DI) and one Discrete Output (DO) function block
• One channel for temperature compensated data in transducer block
• Additional channels in the transducer block for Discrete Output variables. The
following variables can be assigned to Discrete Output Block.
- Start Sensor Zero
- Reset Mass Total
- Reset API Reference (Standard) Volume Total
- Reset All Totals
- Reset ED Reference Volume Total
- Reset ED Net Mass Total
- Reset ED Net Volume Total
- Start/Stop All Totals
- Increment ED Curve
- Reset Gas Standard Volume Total
- Start Meter Verification in Continuous Measurement Mode
• Live software download through FOUNDATION Fieldbus segment is supported
• PlantWeb Field Diagnostic (FD) is supported –t he diagnostic information is based on
NAMUR NE 107 standard. AMS v12 will be supporting NE 107
• Link Master Functionality is supported
• The following functionality:
- Auto commission
- Auto replacement
• The following alarms:
- A128 = Transmitter Factory configuration data invalid
- A129 = Transmitter factory configuration data checksum invalid
• Fault Disconnection Electronics (FDE)
• Support for the following Function Blocks:
- Resource Block = 1
- Transducer Block = 1
- Analog Input Blocks = 4
- Analog Output Blocks = 2
- Discrete Input Block = 1
- Discrete Output Block = 1
- PID Block = 1
- Integrator Block = 1
Table 5-10. Software version 7.1
Operating
instructions
Date
Changes to software
09/2013
Firmware adjustments:
• Release adds support for new IR detector hardware on the display
228
20020223 Rev. AA
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
NE53 history
Table 5-11. Software version 7.20
Changes to firmware
01/2014
Firmware adjustments:
• Fixes BAD-PV reporting at the fieldbus host
Operating
instructions
20020223 Rev. AA
Display
Date
Table 5-12. Software version 8.0
Changes to firmware
01/2013
Firmware adjustments:
• When the Integrator function block is set for internal mass total, the RESET_IN stops
the total but does not reset the internal total
• The XD_ERROR parameter has incorrect values in every transducer block
• PlantWeb alerts are inconsistent and duplicated
• Six Micro Motion alerts are not mapped to PlantWeb alerts
• In auto mode, it is not possible to abort Smart Meter Verification
• Device Descriptor shows wrong default value
• The Smart Meter Verification count is not incremented when the test is initiated from
coil 190
• “Loading SW” message is not shown on display while upgrading firmware in device
Operating
instructions
20020223 Rev. AA
NE53 History
Date
Feature additions:
• Support added for Compact Density Meter (CDM), Fork Density Meter (FDM), and
Fork Viscosity Meter (FVM) — supported as core processors
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus stack upgraded to TH6.04
• Plantweb alerts are replaced by NE107 field diagnostics
• The following new channels added for Analog Input (AI) function block to support the
CDM, FDM, and FVM:
- User-Defined Calculations (Channel No 37)
- Sensor Time Period (Upper) (Channel No 38)
- Sensor Time Period (Channel No 39)
- Tube-Case Temperature Differential (Channel No 40)
- Dynamic Viscosity (Channel No 41)
- Kinematic Viscosity (Channel No 42)
- Base Viscosity (Channel No 43)
- Quality Factor (Channel No 44)
- Velocity (Channel No 45)
- CCAI (Channel No 46)
- CII (Channel No 47)
• Support for the following function blocks:
- Analog Input Blocks = 4 (Execution time 19 msec each)
- Analog Output Blocks = 2 (Execution time 18 msec each)
- Discrete Input Block = 1 (Execution time 16 msec)
- Discrete Output Block = 1 (Execution time 16 msec)
- PID Block = 1 (Execution time 20 msec)
- Integrator Block = 1 (Execution time 18 msec)
Configuration and Use Manual
229
NE53 history
230
Model 2700 Transmitters with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
*20000326*
20000326
Rev. EC
2016
Micro Motion Inc. USA
Worldwide Headquarters
7070 Winchester Circle
Boulder, Colorado 80301
T +1 303-527-5200
T +1 800-522-6277
F +1 303-530-8459
www.micromotion.com
Micro Motion Europe
Emerson Automation Solutions
Neonstraat 1
6718 WX Ede
The Netherlands
T +31 (0) 704136666
F +31 (0) 318 495 556
www.micromotion.nl
Micro Motion Asia
Emerson Automation Solutions
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
Republic of Singapore
T +65 6777-8211
F +65 6770-8003
Micro Motion United Kingdom
Emerson Automation Solutions
Emerson Process Management Limited
Horsfield Way
Bredbury Industrial Estate
Stockport SK6 2SU U.K.
T +44 0870 240 1978
F +44 0800 966 181
Micro Motion Japan
Emerson Automation Solutions
1-2-5, Higashi Shinagawa
Shinagawa-ku
Tokyo 140-0002 Japan
T +81 3 5769-6803
F +81 3 5769-6844
©2016 Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson
Electric Co. Micro Motion, ELITE, ProLink, MVD and MVD Direct
Connect marks are marks of one of the Emerson Automation
Solutions family of companies. All other marks are property of their
respective owners.